Chauvet | Tiger DMX 60 | Operator`s manual | Chauvet Tiger DMX 60 Operator`s manual

Pearl 2008
Pearl Tiger
Operator’s Manual
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Useful Avolites phone numbers:Avolites England
Sales and service*
(+44) (0) 20 8965 8522
Service out of hours*
(+44) (0) 831 17 8888
Fax
(+44) (0) 20 8965 0290
Email
name@avolites.com
Website
http://www.avolites.com
*Before contacting Avolites for service enquiry please ensure that you have the
product serial number and the Software version. The serial number can be
found on the back of the desk and the software version can be found by turning
the key to “System” and reading the version from the top line of the display.
The latest version of this manual and Pearl Software can be downloaded
from the Avolites website.
The small print :
No Liability for Consequential Damages
Avolites has a policy of continuous product and documentation improvement. As such the
detail within this manual may not match the operation of the Pearl 2008.
In no event shall Avolites be liable for any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or
consequential damages or loss whatsoever (including, without limitation, damages for loss
of profits, business interruption, or other pecuniary loss) arising out of the use or inability
to use the Pearl even if Avolites Ltd. has been advised of the possibility of such damages.
Because some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of liability for
consequential or incidental damages, the above limitation may not apply to you.
Avolites Ltd recognise that all trademarks within the manual are the property of their
respective owners.
Reprint and revision history:
First produced July 2007
Re-issued with corrections Jan 2011
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
This manual was written by Tim Mitchell, Sabre Technology Ltd
http://www.sabretechnology.co.uk
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
T U T O R I A L
C O N T E N T S
1.
WELCOME TO THE PEARL
1
2.
PATCHING
7
3.
CONTROLLING DIMMERS AND FIXTURES
15
4.
PALETTES
19
5.
SHAPES
23
6.
MEMORIES
27
7.
CHASES
35
8.
THEATRE STACK
41
9.
THE GRAPHICS TABLET
45
10. RUNNING YOUR SHOW
47
11. ADVANCED FEATURES
51
12. INTRODUCTION TO INTELLIGENT LIGHTING
53
13. INTRODUCTION TO AVOLITES CONSOLES
55
14. CHANGES IN THE LATEST PEARL SOFTWARE
59
R E F E R E N C E
M A N U A L
C O N T E N T S
1.
SETTING UP THE CONSOLE
109
2.
PATCHING
117
3.
CONTROLLING DIMMERS AND FIXTURES
125
4.
PALETTES
135
5.
SHAPES
141
6.
MEMORIES
147
7.
CHASES
159
8.
THEATRE STACK
171
9.
THE GRAPHICS TABLET
179
10. RUNNING THE SHOW
183
11. AUTOMATED PLAYBACK (SCRIPT FILES)
187
12. SETUP
195
13. OTHER FEATURES
201
14. THE PERSONALITY FILE SYSTEM
215
15. GLOSSARY OF TERMS
227
16. INDEX
233
Pages in the Tutorial section have numbers below 100. Pages in
the Reference manual have numbers above 100.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Pearl 2008
Pearl Tiger
Tutorial
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
1. Welcome to the Pearl - Page 1
I N T R O D U C T I O N
1.
Welcome to the Pearl
This manual is designed to help you get the most out of your Pearl
console. We have divided it into two sections.
•
This first section is a tutorial which gives you a step by step guide
of how to carry out the most common functions of the Pearl. If you
are new to the console, working through this part will give you a
good introduction.
•
The second section is a reference manual which tells you
everything there is to know about the Pearl.
To help you move between the two sections, we have made the chapter
numbering the same, so if you are using the tutorial and you want
more information, just look for the same chapter number in the
reference manual.
At the back of the reference manual there is a Glossary, explaining
some of the technical terms used in the manual, and an Index which
can be used to find what you need in either section of the manual.
This manual applies to both the Pearl 2008 and the Pearl Tiger
consoles. The internal operating software is the same for both consoles,
but there are some external differences which are highlighted in the
text. The manual may also be used with the Pearl 2004 and Pearl 2000
consoles but some features described may not be available on the
earlier consoles.
1.1
Setting up the Pearl
Before you can use the Pearl, you need to connect various things to it.
Ensure the power is off while making these connections.
Important: Firstly check if your console has a voltage selector switch
on the back of the console next to the power socket. If it has, make
sure it matches your mains power. You can set it to 230V or 120V.
If you plug in the power with the switch set wrongly, you will
probably blow up the power supply. This would be a Bad Thing To Do
a few hours before a show.
Connect the mains inlet to an AC power supply.
If you are using an external VDU screen, connect a VGA monitor
(640x480 text mode) to the VDU output on the back of the console.
You don’t have to use the VDU screen but it does show some additional
information that is not shown on the console display.
Connect the DMX output(s) to your lighting fixtures or dimmers. The
Pearl 2000 consoles and later have four DMX output sockets. The Pearl
2000 has only two DMX sockets, but four DMX lines may be connected
to them using a splitter cable. Chapter 1 in the reference manual has
more details on DMX connections.
Plug the desk light into the socket on the top left of the console. If you
are going to use a QWERTY keyboard to set legends, plug it into its
socket.
Turn on the power. The console display and VDU screen (if you are
using one) should come alive.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 2 - 1. Welcome to the Pearl
1.2
Finding your way about on the Pearl 2008
Mode select keyswitch
Preset handles
Playback page
select roller
Master faders
Main display
Playback faders &
flash buttons
Control
wheels
Menu
softkeys
Fixture page
buttons
Command
buttons
Numeric
keypad and
controls
The Pearl might initially appear to have an alarming number of sliders
and buttons on it, but don’t be scared of it. The main controls are:
•
The Preset Faders are used to control individual dimmer channels
and fixture intensities. The 2 buttons below the faders are used to
select and flash fixtures. Each fader and buttons is called a “Handle”.
•
The Mode select keyswitch sets the operating mode of the console;
Program for programming a show, Run for running the show and
System for configuring the console.
•
The Page select roller lets you select different pages of playbacks,
and you can write the playback names on the roller so you know
what’s in them.
•
The Master faders control the overall output of the various parts of
the console. You will normally have these set at Full.
•
The Playback faders and flash buttons are used to play back
memories you have programmed, when you are running a show.
•
The Main display is the nerve centre of the console and shows you
what is going on. The display can show various screens of information.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Attribute
select buttons
1. Welcome to the Pearl - Page 3
•
The Control wheels are used to set control values on the fixtures,
and to set chase speeds and fades.
•
The Menu softkeys (labelled A – G) are used to select control options.
The display next to the buttons shows what each one will do. The
options for each key change depending on what the console is doing.
Softkey commands are shown in the manual with square brackets like
this: A [Chase Parameters]
•
The Numeric keypad and other control buttons are used to enter
values and change controls on the console.
•
The Fixture Page buttons are below the keypad, which select 4 pages
for the Preset Faders.
•
The blue Command buttons are used to carry out functions such as
storing memories, copying, saving to disk, etc. These buttons have
lights on to indicate when they are active.
•
The Attribute select buttons are used to select which attributes of a
fixture (e.g. colour, gobo, pan, focus) are going to be controlled using
the Control wheels. The buttons have lights on to show you which
attributes are active. The bottom (red) button is the Locate button
used to position a fixture at its “home” position during programming.
The VDU screen shows more information than the on-board display. It
is useful when setting up the console and programming shows. When
entering text or numbers, what you are typing is shown only on the
VDU screen. If you are short of space you can often manage without it
when you are running a show.
Fixture output values
Today’s date and time
Memory contents
Function of
left wheel
Function of
right wheel
The main part of the display shows the output of the console for one of
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 4 - 1. Welcome to the Pearl
the types of fixture you are using (you can show different things using
the View button, see page 112). Across the bottom of the display, the
current page of memories is shown. The “A B” at the right side of the
screen shows which functions are currently assigned to the control
wheels.
1.3
Finding your way about on the Pearl Tiger
The Pearl Tiger is very similar to its larger brother but has been cut
down in a few areas. It has only one bank of preset handles and has
fewer playback faders.
Mode select keyswitch
Preset handles
Playback page
select roller
Master faders
Main display
Playback faders &
flash buttons
Control
wheels
Menu
softkeys
Fixture page
buttons
Command
buttons
Numeric
keypad and
controls
Attribute
select buttons
All functions are the same as the Pearl 2008 as shown
on the previous page. The Pearl Tiger has an optional
“wing” (pictured right) which may be plugged in to
increase the number of playback faders to 15.
1.4
Avolites Visualiser
Avolites supplies a PC-based 3D visualisation system called Visualiser.
This enables you to design and program your lighting when you do not
have access to the rig. Visualiser is linked to the console using the MIDI
ports (or the Visualiser socket if one is fitted). Fixtures will highlight as
you select them on the console, and you will see them move and
change attributes as you operate the controls on the console.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
1. Welcome to the Pearl - Page 5
1.5
The Pearl simulator
You can download a free Pearl simulator from the Avolites website,
which runs on a PC. This allows you to work on the Pearl even when
you haven’t got the real console with you. You can patch the desk, and
program shows using the Avolites Visualiser, then save the show to disk
and load it into the real console. The simulator operates almost exactly
like the real Pearl.
1.6
What you’ll need for the tutorial
The rest of the first part of this manual is a hands-on tutorial. If you
have never used an Avolites console before, by working through the
rest of the tutorial section you should be able to get the Pearl up and
running, and be well on the way to programming and running a show
with it.
The tutorial is organised in
the order you’ll need to do
things to get the console set
up and working, so try to
work through it in sequence.
To make the most of it, you
will need a few lights set up to
play with; a couple of moving
lights and a few dimmers
would be best. If you can’t lay
your hands on any real lights,
you can use Avolites
Visualiser to simulate some
lights.
When you are preparing to start programming a new show, it’s handy
to have the following things.
•
A lighting plan of your rig which you can scribble on
•
A USB memory stick (or blank floppy disk) to save your work
•
Some white or clear tape and a fine black marker pen to mark up
the console so you know what’s where
•
Paper & pen to make notes (or a laptop, depending on how
technological you are)
•
Manuals or DMX tables for the fixtures you’re using
•
A supply of beverages of your choice
If you are new to intelligent lighting, or even new to lighting altogether,
read chapter 12, “Introduction to intelligent lighting”. This explains the
concepts behind digital control of lighting and will help you to
understand what we are going on about in the rest of the manual.
There is also a Glossary at the end of the Reference Manual which
explains some of the obscure lighting words we have used in the
manual.
If you are used to older Pearl software, read chapter 14, “Changes in
the latest Pearl software”, which gives you a quick rundown on the
differences between the two consoles.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 6 - 1. Welcome to the Pearl
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
2. Patching - Page 7
C H A P T E R
2.
T W O
Patching
In
•
•
•
this chapter: how to set up the Pearl to control dimmers and fixtures.
patching dimmers
patching moving light fixtures
setting addresses on the fixtures
So, you have your fixtures and dimmers all connected up with DMX
cables and the Pearl connected to the end of it. (If you have a big rig,
you might find it easier to learn the basics
using a few dimmers and a few moving
lights, and leave the rest of it till you’re an
expert).
First you need to allocate each fixture or
dimmer to a preset fader on the Pearl, so
that you can tell it which of the fixtures or
dimmers you want to control at any time.
The bottom fader and the buttons below it
(the picture shows some) are called the
handle for the dimmer or fixture, because
you use it to take control of the fixture. The
fader will control the intensity of the dimmer
or fixture, the “Swop” button is used when
programming to select the dimmer or
fixture. In Run mode the Flash and Swop
buttons function as flash buttons.
a “handle”
You also need to tell the Pearl what type of fixture is allocated to each
handle. When you have entered this information, the Pearl can tell you
what DMX addresses to set on your fixtures and dimmers to match the
settings it is using. If you prefer, you can set your fixtures and dimmers
beforehand and tell the Pearl what DMX addresses it should be using.
This setup process is called Patching.
You can patch up to 240 fixtures and
dimmer channels on the Pearl. There are 4
“pages” of 60 handles, selected using the
“Pages of Fixtures” buttons below the
numeric keypad.
Tiger: The Pearl Tiger only has 30 handles
per page.
The Pearl controls dimmers and fixtures
slightly differently, so we will look at each
in turn.
2.1
Pages of Fixtures
buttons
Clearing the Pearl - Wipeall
It’s always a good idea to clear the Pearl’s memory before you start a
new setup. This ensures that you won’t get confused by any peculiar
settings left by the previous user.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 8 - 2. Patching
Clearing the Pearl
Turn the mode keyswitch to “System”
Select softkey A [Service]
Select softkey F [Wipe].
Press F [“Wipeall], to confirm. The
memory will be wiped.
Turn the key to “Program” to prepare
for programming.
Mode keyswitch
The Pearl is now pristine and new, with all
options set to default, and all memories empty, ready for you to start
your show.
2.2
Patching dimmers
Each dimmer channel you want to use has to be allocated to one of the
handles. Then, when you want to control the dimmer channel, you just
fade up the slider.
Patching dimmer channels
Make sure the key is set to “Program”
Press Patch (one of the blue “command” buttons).
Press A [Dimmer]
The Pearl will start at DMX address 001 (shown on
the top line of the display). If your dimmer rack is
at a different address, you can change this by
typing in the new address on the numeric keypad.
Press the blue preset “Swop” button below preset
fader number 1. The fader and flash/swop buttons
will become the “handle” used to control that
dimmer channel.
The Pearl will update the DMX address to the next
free channel, so you can just press another button
to patch the next dimmer.
Swop button
Press Exit when you have finished patching.
You can now control the dimmer channel on handle 1 using the fader
(the buttons do not operate as flash buttons in Program mode, only in
Run mode).
If you have lots of dimmers to patch, there are some quicker ways. If
you just want to patch 10 dimmers in sequence on to handles 21-30,
you can do it this way:
Patching a range of dimmers to buttons
Enter Dimmer Patch mode
Enter the DMX channel you want the range to start at, if it’s
different to the one the Pearl is displaying
Hold down the Swop button of the first handle to be patched
(handle 21)
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
2. Patching - Page 9
Press the last Swop button (handle 30)
Release the first Swop button, then the last Swop button
Each handle will be patched in order to a dimmer channel.
Press Exit when you have finished patching.
You can also patch more than one dimmer channel on the same handle.
This can be useful when you have several lights on different dimmer
channels, but you always want to control them together. For example,
if you have lit an area with several spots and you just want them all to
come up on one fader, this is a good way to do that. Multiple patches
like this are displayed at the bottom of the VDU screen.
Patching several dimmers to the same button
Enter Dimmer Patch mode
Using the numeric keypad, enter the DMX address of the first
dimmer channel to be patched
Press the Swop button for the handle you want to use (this patches
the first dimmer)
Using the numeric keypad, enter the DMX address of the next
dimmer channel to be patched (the Pearl will have automatically
increased the address by 1)
Press the Swop button again
Press Exit when you have finished patching
You can repeat this procedure to patch as
many dimmers as you like on to one handle.
So far, you’ve patched onto the bottom bank
of faders. You can also patch onto the top
bank of faders. If you have 30 or less fixtures,
it’s easiest to patch fixtures to the bottom
faders, and your dimmers to the top faders,
then you can have them all accessible without
having to change the fixture page.
Tiger: The Pearl Tiger does not have the top
31-60 faders but you can still patch to
those handles as described below.
This allows compatibility between
shows programmed on a Tiger and on
a Pearl 2008.
top faders
Patching to the top fader bank
Patch the dimmer as normal, but hold down the AVO (shift) button
while pressing the blue Swop button for the fader below. The AVO
button is next to the numeric keypad
The dimmer channel will be patched to the top fader (for example if
you press Swop button 1 with AVO, you will patch to fader 31)
Press AVO with another Swop button to patch to another top fader
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 10 - 2. Patching
You can patch multiple dimmer channels to the top faders by holding
down the AVO button, then holding the first swop button, then pressing
the last button of the range to be patched.
While you are in Patch mode, the VDU screen shows a DMX channel
grid to tell you which
channels you have
patched so far and
which are free.
Dimmers and fixtures
are identified by
different letters,
dimmers are always
“a”.
You can also display
the patch on the LCD
screen by pressing
View (on the numeric
keypad) then C [DMX patch] (shows which handle each DMX channel is
allocated to) or D [Fixture patch], which shows a list in handle order.
2.3
Patching moving light fixtures
Moving light fixtures are controlled slightly differently to dimmers; a
dimmer only has one controllable attribute, intensity. But a moving
light fixture can have many attributes, such as pan, tilt, colour, gobo
etc. When you patch a fixture, you will see on the VDU screen that it
occupies a block of DMX channels rather than just one. However, the
principle is still the same.
The Pearl has personality files for most lighting fixtures in the known
universe, and these are stored internally in the console. If you want to
use a personality not available in the console, you can load it from a
personality disk, a wide range of which can be downloaded from the
Avolites website. See section 12 in the reference manual for details of
how to download personalities.
Patching a fixture
Press Patch
Press B [Choose a fixture]
Press the softkey next to the “AVOCACH” USB drive
A list of fixture manufacturers is shown. Use Softkeys F and G to go
up and down the list and find the correct manufacturer of your
fixture, then press the Softkey next to the name to select it.
A list of fixture types is now shown. Use Softkeys F and G to go up
and down the list and find the correct fixture, then press the
Softkey next to the fixture to select it.
The Pearl will load the fixture information (this may take a few
seconds). The display shows information about the fixture.
The Pearl will ask “Use preset palettes?”.
Press A [Yes]. (This is explained later)
The Pearl will offer you the first free DMX address (on the top line
of the display). You can change this using the numeric keypad if
you want the fixture at a different address.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
2. Patching - Page 11
Press the Swop button on handle 11 to patch the fixture you have
selected to handle 11.
The display will show the block of channels occupied by the fixture.
Patch more fixtures, or press Exit when you have finished.
You can continue to patch this type of fixture at the next free DMX
address by pressing the next Swop button you want to use. You can
also patch a range of fixtures by holding down the first button in the
range and pressing the last button, as with dimmers.
You can patch fixtures to the top faders by holding down the AVO
button and pressing the Swop button for the fader below, but if you do
this you will need to hold down the AVO button to select them when
programming as well, so it’s easiest to only patch dimmers to the top
faders as you can control dimmers just with the fader.
If you want to patch a different type of fixture, you can change the type
of fixture to be patched very easily.
To change the fixture type
Press A [Select another fixture]
Choose the fixture type from the list on the softkeys
Patch as before
Note:
The “preset palettes” contain 9 position, 10 colour and 10 gobo
settings. You can call back these settings instantly from the
palette buttons when you are programming. This allows you to
select, for example, “Yellow” or “Blue” instead of setting up the
value using the wheels. You can only load the preset palettes
during patching.
The Pearl has four physical DMX output lines, identified as A, B, C, D.
You can patch onto any of the four lines using E [Select a DMX line].
However, to keep it simple, stick to line A while you are learning.
2.4
Labelling the console
It’s a good idea to stick a strip of tape above the handle Swop buttons,
and write on it what is patched on each handle, such as “Mac SL”, “Mac
Centre” etc. This will help you greatly when programming as you try
and remember where you patched everything.
2.5
Addressing lights to match the Pearl
When you are patching, it’s easiest to let the Pearl allocate all the DMX
addresses, then go round to the actual dimmers and fixtures and set
the addresses to match the Pearl’s settings. This makes sure that there
are no overlaps or gaps in the DMX addresses.
You can also work out the DMX map yourself and tell the Pearl what
DMX channels to use while you’re patching, but then you need to make
sure yourself that nothing overlaps.
The Pearl can tell you the DMX address it is using for each fixture, and
in some cases can show you how to set the dip switches on the fixture.
Write down the addresses for all the fixtures, then go and set them.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 12 - 2. Patching
Displaying the DMX address for
fixtures
Press the View button (next to
the numeric keys)
Press D [Fixture Patch]
The display will show a list of
the handles to which you have
patched fixtures or dimmers,
with the DMX line and address
(e.g. A24 is address 24 on DMX
line A).
One handle on the list has an
arrow next to it. In the lower
part of the screen, more
information is shown for this
fixture.
Use the Arrow keys to move the
arrow up and down the list, and
show information for the other
fixtures in the list.
You can also press View then C [DMX Patch] to display a list of
DMX channels and which fixture is patched at that address.
2.6
Changing what you have done
If you need to change the patching you have done, it’s possible to repatch a fixture to a different DMX address using the Repatch Fixtures
softkey. You can also move a fixture onto a different handle, and delete
a fixture from a handle, but this loses any programming for the fixture.
How to change the patching is described in detail in section 2 of the
reference manual on page 121.
2.7
Patch Utilities
You can invert the operation of channels and set various other fixturespecific options using the Patch Utilities softkey. Inverting pan and tilt
channels can be useful to mirror fixtures on opposite sides of the stage,
or to correct for hanging a fixture the wrong way round. Section 2 of
the reference manual on page 122 describes how to set these options.
2.8
Completing the patch
When you have patched all your dimmers and fixtures, press the Exit
button on the numeric keypad to go back to normal mode. You have
now completed the setting up of the lighting system, and it’s time to
get to work on programming a show. But there’s one important thing to
do first…
2.9
Saving the contents of the Pearl to disk
The Pearl has a USB port which allows you to save everything you have
done to a USB pen drive. The Pearl 2008 also has a floppy disk drive for
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
2. Patching - Page 13
compatibility with earlier consoles. You should get into the habit of
saving your show regularly to guard against that unexpected moment
when the worst happens.
The USB socket is on the front edge of the console for the Pearl 2008
and on the rear panel of the Pearl Tiger (on a small number of Pearl
2008 consoles it is on the rear panel).
It only takes a minute or so to save the contents of the Pearl. You can
then reload it if you mess up the show by
accidentally changing something, or if some
helpful person steals the Pearl you can load
your programming into a replacement
console and the show can go on.
Backing up the Pearl to disk
Press the Disk button in the bottom
right hand corner of the Pearl
Disk button
Insert a USB pen drive, or on the Pearl 2008 you can use a
formatted 1.44MB floppy disk.
Select B [Save show to disk].
The Pearl will ask for a filename for the show. Type this on the
QWERTY keyboard (your typing is only shown on the VDU screen)
then press Enter. If you don’t have a keyboard connected you can
use the 1-30 Swop and Flash buttons to enter letters, or just
accept the default showname by pressing Enter.
Press one of the softkeys to select the disk/USB drive where you
want to save the show.
The Pearl will save your current show onto the disk. The display will
tell you when the Pearl has finished.
The Pearl will not respond to any buttons or sliders while saving or
loading a show. The DMX output will be frozen in its last state.
If you need to reload the show, press Disk then A [Load show from
disk]. Select the disk/USB drive where you saved the show, then
press one of the softkeys to select the show you wish to load.
If you are using a USB drive, the next time you save the show, you can
use the same name again (just press Enter) and the Pearl will keep
backups of each version of the show that you save. When you reload
the show, you can choose which version you want to load, each backup
being tagged with the date and time you saved it.
If you are using a floppy disk, only the most recent version of the show
is saved.
2.10
Examples
How do I patch a 6 channel DMX dimmer pack to faders 31-36?
Press Patch, then A [Dimmer]. Note the DMX address where the Pearl is
going to patch (on the top line of the display). Hold down the AVO
button. Press the blue Swop buttons for channels 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6.
Let go of the AVO button. Because you were holding down AVO, the
dimmers are patched to the top set of faders, 31-36. Press Exit twice to
leave Patch mode. Finally set your dimmer pack’s DMX address to
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 14 - 2. Patching
match the Pearl (if you are not sure of the address, press View then D
[Fixture patch], then use the Down Arrow button to scroll to show
Handle 31; the display shows the DMX address where the handle is
patched).
How do I patch a Mac600 to handle 10?
Press Patch, then B [Choose a fixture]. Press F [More] until one of the
softkey options is Martin. Press the softkey for that option. Press F
[More] until one of the softkey options is MMac600m4. Press the
softkey for that option. Wait for the Pearl to load the personality. When
the Pearl asks “Use preset palettes?” press A [Yes]. Note the DMX
address where the Pearl is going to patch (on the top line of the
display). Press Swop button 10 to patch the fixture. Press Exit twice to
leave Patch mode. Finally set the Mac 600’s DMX address to match the
Pearl (we have used the Mode 4 personality so it will also need to be in
Mode 4).
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
3. Controlling dimmers and fixtures - Page 15
C H A P T E R
3.
T H R E E
Controlling dimmers and fixtures
In this chapter: how to control dimmers and fixtures manually.
•
controlling fixtures and dimmers
•
changing attributes
•
using and creating groups
•
align and fan functions
•
viewing the console output
Having patched all the dimmers and fixtures you want to use, you are
ready to start operating them. This chapter explains how you do this.
To manually control fixtures and dimmers, you need to be in Program
mode, so ensure the key is set to Program. There’s also a special Run
mode which lets you “take over” fixtures during a show, which is
described later.
3.1
Controlling dimmer channels
Controlling dimmer channels is simple – you just push up the fader of
the handle where the dimmer is patched. Dimmers work just like a
normal “preset” lighting desk on the Pearl. If you want to turn on lots of
dimmer channels at the same time, you can also “select” the dimmers
and use the Dimmer attribute button and control wheels as described
below.
3.2
Controlling fixtures
Controlling fixtures is nearly as simple, except there are a few more
functions to control than just intensity.
The first thing you have to do is to “select” the fixtures that you want
to control. The Pearl then knows that any changes you make are only
to be sent to these fixtures. You can select fixtures individually, or
several at once.
Selecting fixtures or dimmers
Press the Swop buttons for the fixtures you want to control. (For
dimmers and fixtures on the top bank of faders, hold down the AVO
button and press the Swop buttons below the faders you want)
The Swop button LEDs will light for the fixtures which are selected.
They are shown in dark blue on the VDU screen.
If you select a fixture you don't want, press its Swop button again
to deselect it.
You can select a range of fixtures by holding down the Swop button
for the first fixture in the range, then pressing the Swop button for
the last fixture.
Press the red Locate button (bottom right corner) to position the
selected fixtures at a central position with the light on, so you can
see where they are. Dimmer channels are set to 100%.
You can change the fixture page, if you need to, by pressing one of the
other Fixture Page buttons.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 16 - 3. Controlling dimmers and fixtures
You can select dimmers or fixtures patched to the top faders by holding
down the AVO button and pressing the Swop button for the fader
below.
Tiger:
3.3
To select dimmers or fixtures patched to handles 31-60, hold
down the AVO button and press the Swop button for handle 130.
Changing attributes of fixtures
Having selected the fixtures you want to control, you
then need to select the attributes (pan, tilt, colour
etc.) of that fixture that you want to change.
The attributes are selected using the buttons on the
lower right corner of the Pearl and controlled using
the wheels. The attributes you can control will vary
depending on the type of fixture you are using. For
dimmer channels, you can only change the “Dimmer”
attribute (intensity). For moving lights, you can
control the pan, tilt, colour, gobo and other functions.
Controlling pan and tilt of a fixture
Select some fixtures using the Swop buttons
Press Locate (the red button at the bottom right
of the console) to position the fixtures at a central
position with the lamp on (you don’t have to do
this, but it helps you see what’s happening)
Press the Pan/Tilt attribute button
Control the tilt using the left hand wheel and the
pan using the right hand wheel. You
should see the selected fixtures
move.
Attribute buttons
The display area just above the
wheels shows you which attribute is
being controlled by each wheel.
Any other attribute of the fixtures you selected can be controlled by
pressing the appropriate button and turning the wheels. The display will
show which functions the left and right wheels are going to control.
Very few fixture types have the full range of attributes; if the display
doesn’t show a function when you select an attribute button, that
function is not available on the fixtures you selected.
You can view the attribute settings on the LCD screen by pressing the
View button then B [Fixture Attributes]. You can change which attribute
you are viewing by pressing a different Attribute button.
If the fixture personality supports range tables and Intelligent Attribute
Display is turned on (Hold AVO and press 1) then for some attributes,
rather than showing a percentage value above the wheels, the current
colour or gobo name will be displayed. This only happens on some
fixtures.
You can use the Dimmer attribute to control the intensity channel of the
fixture, or you can use the fader of the handle. The effect is the same.
Note: Once you have changed any attributes, all the fixtures will be
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
3. Controlling dimmers and fixtures - Page 17
automatically deselected the next time you press a fixture
select button.
3.4
Using groups
If you’ve got several fixtures performing a similar function, you often
want to select them all at the same time. To avoid lots of swop-buttonpressing, the Pearl allows you to put fixtures or dimmer channels into
groups, which you can then use to select all the fixtures just by typing
the group number. If you are using the graphics tablet you just press
one button on the tablet and all the fixtures in the group are magically
selected.
Making a group
Select the fixtures or dimmer channels you want to put into the
group
Press the ML Menu button, then E [Record Group].
Type the group number 1-200 on the numeric keypad and press
Enter.
Once you have created a group, you can then quickly select all the
fixtures in the group:
Selecting a group of fixtures
Type the group number on the keypad
Press A [Recall Group].
The fixtures in the group are selected, all other fixtures are
deselected.
If you are using the graphics tablet, you can save and recall groups
with one touch of the pen. This is described in more detail in the
Graphics Tablet chapter.
3.5
Copying settings from other fixtures – Align
If you’ve set a nice colour on one of your fixtures, and you want to
copy it to all the other fixtures of the same type, the Pearl’s Align
function can do that. You can also use it to make all pan and tilt
positions the same for a range of units or to make dimmer levels the
same.
Copying settings from other fixtures
Press an attribute button to select the attribute you want to copy
Select the fixture or dimmer channel you want to copy from
Select the fixtures or dimmer channels you want to copy to
Press the ML Menu button, then D [Align <attribute name>]”.
Or you can press C [Align Fixtures], to align all attributes.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 18 - 3. Controlling dimmers and fixtures
3.6
Fan mode
Fan mode automatically spreads out a selected range of fixtures to
produce a fan of light beams, like rays of sunlight. The first and last
fixtures of the range are affected most, and the central fixtures are
affected least. The amount of fan can be set using the wheels.
Note: The order in which you select the fixtures sets how the fan effect
works. The fixtures you select first and last will be the ones
which change most.
The fan effect, while normally used on pan or tilt attributes, can be
applied to any attribute.
Fanning out a range of fixtures
Select the range of fixtures you want to fan
Select the attribute to fan (pan, tilt, colour etc)
Press the Fan button (one of the blue command buttons)
Set the amount of fan using the wheels
The display shows which attribute is being controlled by each wheel
Press the Fan button again to exit Fan mode when you’ve finished
You will be able to see the effect of fan mode best if you have a row of
at least 4 fixtures. If you have an odd number of fixtures, the central
fixture will not move in fan mode.
Remember to turn off Fan mode when you have finished (by pressing
the Fan button again), or you will get confused when the controls don’t
do what you expect.
3.7
Examples
How do I fade up the dimmer on handles 31-36?
Just push up the faders 31-36 (make sure the Grand Master and A/B
Master faders are up)
How do I make the mac 600 on handle 10 go blue and point at
the cyclorama?
Select the fixture by pressing Swop button 10. Press Locate (bottom
right of the console) to turn on the mac600 and centre it. Press the
“Cyan/Magenta” attribute button. Turn the A wheel anticlockwise to
make the amount of Cyan change (you can turn B wheel anticlockwise
to make the Magenta change which will give a darker blue). Press the
“Tilt-Pan” attribute button. Turn the A and B wheels (the mac600
should move) until it points in the direction you want.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
4. Palettes - Page 19
C H A P T E R
4.
F O U R
Palettes
In this chapter: how to use palettes to set colours, gobos and positions.
• Using palettes to set values
• Creating your own palettes
• Setting which attributes are recorded in a palette
• Shared and individual palettes
When you are controlling your lighting, it would be nice to instantly call
back a position such as centre stage, or a particular colour like red,
blue etc, rather than having to set the value on the wheels every time.
The Pearl has pages of preset values, called “palettes”, which allow you
to do this. The Pearl loads 10 colours, 10 gobos and 10 preprogrammed positions when you patch a fixture (unless you tell it not
to when it asks “Use preset palettes?”). You can use these palettes as
they are, modify them to your own settings, or save new settings.
Palettes have another big advantage. If for example you program a
“centre stage spot” position as a palette, when you use this position in
memories the Pearl remembers the palette you used, rather than the
actual value. This means that if you move to another venue, you can
just reprogram the “centre stage spot” palette entry and every memory
using that position will automatically be updated. If you’d programmed
all your memories directly using the wheels, you would need to go
through and reposition every memory.
Palettes are also useful when you are programming using Visualiser and
you don’t know exactly where the lights will point; you can program
your memories using palette positions, then you just update a few
palettes when you get the real lights in the real venue and the show
programming is done.
4.1
Using palettes to set values
The easiest way to use a palette value is
by the menu on the LCD screen. We’ll use
the preset palettes which the Pearl loaded
when you patched the fixtures to set some
fixtures to Red.
Using palettes
Select the fixtures you want to control
by pressing their Swop buttons
Press the Focus button above the
numeric keypad
Select the page of palettes you want
to use by pressing one of the A-F
softkeys (such as [Colour])
Press one of the A-E softkeys to use
one of the palette values (such as
[Red]). The value will be set to all the
fixtures which are selected. The lights
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 20 - 4. Palettes
should turn red.
To go back to the list of palette pages, press G [Pages].
Press Exit when you have finished with palettes, as other functions
don’t work while in Palette Select mode
You can also apply palettes 1-30 by pressing the grey Palette/Flash
buttons below the preset faders. While you hold the button, the top line
of the display shows the legend for the attribute (White, Green etc).
When you release the button, the palette is applied. If you decide you
don’t want to apply the palette, press the Focus button before you
release the grey Flash button.
4.2
Creating your own palettes
You can easily save your own palettes, or modify existing ones. We’ll
create a position palette.
Storing your own palette
Press Clear (next to the numeric keys) to clear all the changes you
have made so far
Select a couple of fixtures and press the red Locate button
Press the “Tilt-Pan” attribute button.
Position the fixtures using the wheels.
Press the Store Palette button (one of the blue Command buttons)
Type “21” (the palette number to be stored) on the keypad and
press Enter. The position of the fixtures is stored as a palette
You can also store a palette by pressing one of the grey Palette/Flash
buttons below the presets. If you had pressed the grey button for
preset 21, that would have been the same as what we did above.
4.3
What’s stored in a palette
Although you can store all attributes of a fixture in a single palette, it’s
easiest to store some palettes which only affect colour, others which
only affect position, and so on. This means when you recall a palette
entry, you know which attributes of the fixture are going to change.
You do this using the Attribute buttons when saving the palette. In the
example above, we had the “Tilt-Pan” attribute selected when storing
the palette, so only the Tilt & Pan values were recorded.
Setting which attributes will be recorded in the palette
Press Clear to clear all the changes you have made so far
Select a couple of fixtures and press the red Locate button
Set a colour using the “colour” attribute button and wheels.
Position the fixtures using the “tilt-pan” attribute button and
wheels.
Press the Store Palette button
Press the Colour attribute button. The Colour button & the
Yellow/Cyan/Magenta buttons will light, showing that these
attributes will be recorded.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
4. Palettes - Page 21
Type “101” on the keypad and press Enter to store the colour.
Press Store Palette again.
Press the Tilt-Pan attribute button.
Type “22” on the keypad and press Enter to store the position.
If you press the “Dimmer” attribute button before storing, this will store
in the palette all the attributes which you have changed. The lights on
the attribute buttons come on to show you what will be stored.
There are ways of extracting only, say, colour information from palettes
which have other attributes as well, which are described in the
reference manual.
4.4
Shared and individual palettes
For some attributes, such as colour, you want to set the same control
values to all the fixtures of the same type. So if you pick Red, you want
the control value for “Red” to go to all fixtures.
For other attributes, like position, each fixture needs a different setting
to get the light beams to point where you want.
If you only select one fixture when creating a palette, that palette is
known as a “shared” palette, and the value will be available to all
fixtures of that type. So to create a shared palette, you press Clear
then select and modify only one fixture.
If you change more than one fixture, the Pearl creates an “individual”
palette which stores a different value for each fixture. This is normally
used for positioning palettes, and sometimes for image focusing. You
can add positions for more fixtures to an individual palette just by
saving the palette again with the new fixtures set.
Note:
4.5
The Pearl may sometimes call palettes “focuses” or “preset
focuses”. This is the term previously used for a palette on
Avolites consoles. The meaning is the same.
Examples
How do I make the Mac600 on handle 10 go Red using a
palette?
Press the handle 10 Swop button to select the fixture. Press the red
Locate button to turn it on so you can see what’s happening. Press
Focus then A [Color] (If softkey G option is [Pages] then press that to
show the list of palette pages). Press B [Red]. The fixture should
change to Red. Press Exit once you’ve finished applying palettes.
How do I store a palette which makes my Mac 600’s point at the
cyclorama?
Press Clear to clear any changes. Press the swop buttons for the Mac
fixtures. Press the red Locate button to turn them on. Press the Tilt/Pan
attribute button. Press the “ ” button. The first fixture will be selected.
Use the wheels to point the fixture where you want. Press the “ ”
button again and point the next fixture. When all fixtures are
positioned, press Store Palette and type 21 on the keypad, then press
Enter. The position only (because the Tilt/Pan button was selected) will
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 22 - 4. Palettes
be stored in palette 21.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
5. Shapes - Page 23
C H A P T E R
5.
F I V E
Shapes
In
•
•
•
•
this chapter: how to use the shape generator
selecting a shape
positioning
setting size and speed
coarse and fine spread
The Pearl, in common with other Avolites consoles, has a shape
generator (sometimes known as an Effects Generator on other
consoles). This allows you to quickly create exciting light shows using
lots of movement and changes, with the minimum of programming.
There are a large number of pre-programmed shapes available, which
can be used on the fixture’s position, colour, gobo, dimmer, iris, focus
and more. You can control the size, speed and positioning of the shape,
and how the shape is allocated across a range of fixtures.
To understand how shapes work and how they can be spread across
multiple fixtures, it’s best to set up at least four fixtures next to each
other. Once you have mastered the basics, you can try some more
interesting arrangements.
5.1
How shapes work
A shape is a pre-programmed movement sequence which usually
repeats over and over again. Typical shapes are circles, spirals,
squares, etc. There are also random shapes, which do not repeat. A
circle shape, for example, would cause the beam of the fixture to move
in a circular path on the stage.
When you apply a shape, it works on the current settings of the fixture.
So if you apply a circle to the pan and tilt attributes of a fixture, the
centre of the circle will be at the current pan and tilt position. You can
change the size of the circle, and the speed of the circle. By moving the
pan and tilt position of the fixture, you can move the whole shape
around the stage.
Shapes can be applied to other attributes of a fixture, not just pan and
tilt. You can use them to create colour changes, gobo changes, iris
changes and a variety of other attributes. Each shape is designed to
modify one particular attribute.
5.2
Selecting a shape
Selecting a shape is very similar to selecting a value from a palette.
When you choose a shape, it will be applied to all selected fixtures.
Selecting a shape
Select the fixtures you want to apply the shape to by pressing the
Swop buttons (you’ll need at least 4 fixtures to see the effects
properly)
Press the red Locate button to turn on the fixtures and move them
to a central position
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 24 - 5. Shapes
Enter the Shape Generator menu by pressing Softkey G (from the
main menu).
Press A [Playback a shape]
Press A [Circle 1] to select a circle
shape
The shape will be applied to all
selected fixtures.
There are a wide range of different
shapes available in the list, use Softkeys
F and G to look through the different
pages. “Rainbow” shapes only work on
fixtures capable of colour mixing, and
there are other shapes such as Iris and
Focus which will only work if your
fixtures have those functions.
The best way to find out what all the
shapes are like is to try them out.
Sometimes it’s hard to describe the
effect in the few letters which fit on the
display.
5.3
Changing the size and speed of a shape
It is easy to change the size and speed of a shape after it has first been
selected.
Changing the size and speed of a shape
If you aren’t already in it, enter the Shape Generator menu by
pressing G [Shape Generator].
Press D [Set wheels A=Size B=Speed]
Control the size of the shape using the left hand wheel
Control the speed of the shape using the right hand wheel
The size and speed is shown above the wheels on the display.
The minimum size is zero. Obviously, you won’t see the shape, and the
fixture will resume its previous settings. The minimum speed is Stop.
Again, you will not see the shape moving, though it will offset the
positioning of the fixture.
5.4
Changing the positioning of a shape
Pan/tilt shapes are based on the current settings of the fixture. This
means that the movements will be centred around the current position
of the fixture.
Changing the positioning of a shape
Select the fixtures you want to change
Set the wheels to Size/Speed and reduce the shape size to 0 (it’s
difficult to see the position when everything is moving)
Press the Pan/Tilt attribute button
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
5. Shapes - Page 25
Set the position using the wheels.
Set the wheels back to Size/Speed and change the size of the
shape back to where you want it.
Shapes on other attributes such as colour, gobo, focus, dimmer and iris
are absolute and are not affected by the current attribute setting,
unless the shape description includes “User” or “Usr”. User shapes are
relative and are centred around the fixture’s current settings.
5.5
How a shape works across multiple fixtures
Shapes get more interesting (and look more impressive) when you
apply them to multiple fixtures. The Pearl lets you set how a shape is
spread across several fixtures.
In the case of a circle, this can vary from all fixtures moving identically
(a spread of None), fixtures working in pairs (a spread of 1) through to
all fixtures being distributed evenly through the shape, so the first
fixture is just starting the shape as the last one finishes (an Even
spread). This is the same as the number of fixtures, so if you have 4
fixtures doing the shape, a spread of 4 would be the same as an Even
spread.
You can also set the Fine Spread value, which introduces a slight offset
into the timing of the shape across each fixture.
Changing the spread of a shape
In the Shape Generator menu, press C [Set wheels to Spread]
Set the coarse spread using the right hand wheel. The minimum is
Even (the shape spread evenly across the fixtures), then Zero (all
the same), then 1, 2, etc.
Set the fine spread using the left hand wheel.
To start with, keep the Fine Spread set to zero, and work with the
Coarse Spread setting, or everything will get confusing.
Note: The order in which you select the fixtures determines how the
shapes are applied; the “first” fixture is the one you select first
and the “last” fixture is the one you select last.
5.6
Examples
How do I make my Mac600’s wave around in a trendy manner?
Select the Mac600’s by pressing the swop buttons. Press the red Locate
button to light them up. Press G [Shape Generator]. Press A [Playback
a shape]. Press A again [Circle 1]. The fixtures will move. Press D [Set
wheels A=Size B=Speed] and use the wheels to set the speed of
movement and the size of the movement.
How do I make my Mac600’s change colour in a rainbow?
Select the Mac600’s by pressing the swop buttons. Press the red Locate
button to light them up. Press G [Shape Generator]. Press A [Playback
a shape]. Press D [Rainbow Spread]. The fixtures will change in
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 26 - 5. Shapes
rainbow colours. Press Softkey D and use the wheels to set the speed
of changes and the number of colours used (the size of the shape).
Note: Rainbow shapes only work with fixtures capable of RGB colour
mixing.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
6. Memories - Page 27
C H A P T E R
6.
S I X
Memories
In
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
this chapter: how to record memories into the playback faders
explanation of HTP and LTP channels
how the Pearl works when programming
recording and playing back memories
playback pages
flash button modes
naming memories
setting fade times for memories
copying and clearing memories
the include function
editing memories
record by fixture or by channel
So, you now know how to control your
dimmers and fixtures, and how to use
the shape generator. This chapter tells
you how to record the wonderful effects
you have created so that you can recall
them at the touch of a button or fader.
The Pearl 2008 has 15 playback faders
across the bottom of the desk, into
which you can record your effects. You
Playback faders and roller
select a different page of playback faders
by rolling the roller above the faders.
There are 30 pages, allowing you to save 450 playbacks in all.
Tiger: The Pearl Tiger has 10 playback faders. The other 5 playback
faders can be added on using the Tiger “Wing”.
Before we get onto the details of recording memories, there are a
couple of general things about how the Pearl works. The first thing to
understand is what happens when you play back more than one
memory at a time, and the operation of HTP and LTP channels. It’s
important to understand this before going on, or nothing else will make
sense.
6.1
What are HTP and LTP channels?
If two or more memories are turned on together, or if you fade out a
memory, the Pearl needs to know how to output the levels from the
memories. To make this work, the Pearl treats channels which control
intensity differently from other moving light control channels.
Dimmer or intensity channels work on the principle of “highest takes
precedence” (HTP). This means that if the same HTP channel is turned
on at different levels in several memories, the highest level will be
output. When you fade a memory, the HTP channels fade out.
Moving light channels work on the principle of “latest takes precedence”
(LTP). This means that the latest change takes over from any other
values, so the most recent memory to be turned on is the one which is
output. When you fade in a memory on a playback fader, LTP channels
do not fade, but come on at their full values, and stay there until
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 28 - 6. Memories
another value is set. This is important, because when you fade in a
memory you normally just want the fixtures to fade up in their proper
position, colour and gobo, you don’t want the fixtures moving and
changing colour (though you can do this if you need to, using different
memory modes).
The fixture personality file tells the Pearl which channels of a fixture are
HTP and which are LTP. Normally, only dimmer attributes are HTP, and
everything else is LTP.
6.2
How the Pearl works when programming
When you start setting dimmers and moving fixtures, the Pearl
remembers what you have changed. Fixtures and dimmers you have
changed are stored in “the programmer” which is a special area of
memory. When you record a memory, only the settings in the
programmer (i.e. the things you have changed) are stored in the
memory.
When you press Clear (by the numeric keypad), all fixtures are cleared
from the programmer. You should get into the habit of pressing Clear
before you start to program a memory, or you can end up recording
fixtures you don’t want. You also need to press Clear when you finish
programming, because any functions in the programmer will override
playbacks.
Channels in the programmer are shown
by an “m” (modified by Preset), “w”
(modified by Wheel) or “P” (modified by
Palette) on the console Channel Output
display, and are shown in light blue on
the VDU screen.
Note:
Turning on a memory does not
place the values from the
memory in the programmer (the
Include function lets you do this,
see page 31). The Locate
Fixture function does not place
any values in the programmer
either.
In the screen shown here, the Locate
Fixture function has been used on
fixtures 1 to 8, then the pan value has
been changed on fixtures 3 to 6. Only
the changed pan value is in the
programmer.
6.3
Recording a memory
So now that is all out in the open, let’s record a memory. The Pearl has
30 pages of 15 memories, which are controlled using the 15 faders
across the bottom of the console. The page is selected using the Roller.
Tiger: The Pearl Tiger still has 30 pages of 15 memories, but only the
first 10 on each page can be controlled using the 10 onboard
playback faders. The other 5 memories can be controlled using
the 5 additional playback faders on the plug-in Tiger “Wing”.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
6. Memories - Page 29
Recording a memory
Press Clear to clear the programmer. This ensures that you are
starting with a clean slate.
Set up a nice effect using the fixtures and
dimmers. You can include shapes in a memory if
you want. Remember! Only the fixtures/dimmers
you have changed will be recorded in the
memory.
Press Memory.
Roll the Roller to the segment you want to use.
The active segment is the one nearest the
playback faders. “A” is a good one to start on.
Memory button
Empty playbacks flash.
Press the Swop button of an empty playback fader you want to
use.
The Swop button above the fader will light up to show that you
have saved a memory there.
You can write a description of the memory onto the roller surface
using marker pen on a strip of tape to help you remember what’s
in it.
Press Clear to clear the programmer.
6.4
Playing back a memory
Playing back a memory is very simple. Just raise the fader. (Make sure
there are no values in the programmer by pressing the Clear button,
because anything in the programmer will override the playback).
Playing back a memory
Raise the playback fader.
To stop the memory, lower the fader.
All the HTP (intensity) channels in the memory will fade up with the
fader. The LTP (movement) channels will be set as soon as the fader
leaves the zero position.
You can preset fixtures in blackout so that when you fade in the
memory, all fixtures are already correctly positioned and set (otherwise
you may see the fixtures move into position, which might be
distracting). This is called Preload. To preload a memory you need to
have the key set to “Run”, then lower the Master Add/Flash slider to
zero and press the playback Flash button.
6.5
Changing playback pages
You can change pages to select another 15 memories simply by rolling
the roller to a new segment.
If any playbacks are turned on when you change page, they remain
turned on. The Swop button above the playback flashes.
If you want to use the same playback fader on a new page, you need to
lower it to zero to turn off the first playback, then raise it again to turn
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 30 - 6. Memories
on the new playback on the new page.
The roller has 10 segments. There are 3 buttons next to the roller
allowing 3 pages of roller.
6.6
Labelling the roller & naming memories
The idea of the roller is that it gives you a handy location for writing the
name of each memory you’ve saved. Stick a strip of tape across the
roller and every time you save a memory, write a brief description of it
on the roller segment above. You will then have a handy quick
reference to what is in each memory.
In addition to the simple but effective technique of writing the memory
name on the roller, if you’re using a VDU screen the Pearl allows you to
enter a legend for each memory and also for each page.
The legend for each memory is shown at the bottom of the VDU screen,
so you can see at a glance what is stored in each fader.
Labelling a memory
Press D [Set Legend].
Press the Swop button of the playback you want to label.
Enter the label using the external QWERTY keyboard. The VDU
screen shows you what you are typing.
Press Enter to save the label.
You can label another memory by pressing another Swop button,
or finish by pressing Exit.
You can also label the playback pages, palette pages and palette entries
using the other softkeys.
Note:
If you don’t have a QWERTY keyboard connected, you can enter
letters using the Swop and Flash buttons on Preset Faders 1-26.
The Swop buttons enter capitals and the Flash buttons enter
lower case letters.
If you don’t have a VDU screen, there is no point entering
memory legends as you need the VDU screen to see them. You
can, however, make use of Palette names on the LCD display.
6.7
Copying a memory
Copying a memory is very fast and simple.
Copying a memory
Hold down the Flash button of the memory you want to copy.
Press the Swop button of the playback you want to store it in
You can change the Roller page while you are holding down the
Flash button, if you want to copy a memory to a different page.
The new memory will be a linked copy of the old one. If you change a
memory which is linked, all the other memories linked to it will change
too.
You can create a completely separate copy of the memory using the
“Photocopy” function. Just press the Photocopy button (one of the blue
command buttons) before you start the copy.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
6. Memories - Page 31
6.8
Deleting a memory
If you want to clear a memory so you can store something else in it:
Deleting a memory
Press Delete (one of the blue command buttons)
Press the Swop button of the playback you want to delete
Press the Swop button again to confirm the delete.
If the memory is linked to other memories, the others will not be
affected.
6.9
Editing memories
You can edit any part of a memory you have already saved simply by
making the changes and saving the new information on top of the
memory.
Editing a memory
Press Clear to empty the programmer.
Turn on the memory you want to edit, so you can see what you are
doing.
Select the fixtures you want to change, and make the changes.
Press Memory.
Press the playback swop button for the memory you are editing to
save the changes.
The Pearl will warn you “A memory already exists on playback!”
Press A [Merge memory].
The changes you have made are saved into the memory. None of the
other information in the memory is affected.
If you want to replace the memory with a new memory, you can use B
[Replace memory].
If you need to remove fixtures or individual attributes of fixtures from
the memory, you can use the “Off” function to do this. The “Off”
function is described in the reference manual.
6.10
The Include function
Sometimes it’s useful to be able to re-use some aspects of a memory
you have already created in another memory. If you’ve created a really
nice pattern of criss-crossing light beams, for example, you might want
to use it again in another memory with different gobos and colours.
Normally when you play back a memory, the information is not loaded
into the programmer, so you can’t simply turn on
a memory, modify it and save it to a new
memory. The Include function lets you reload a
memory back into the programmer. You can then
use it in a new memory.
The Include function loads selected attributes of
selected fixtures into the programmer. So, for
example, if you have a memory which contains
position, colour and gobo information for 8
fixtures, you can use the Include function to load
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Include button
Page 32 - 6. Memories
only the colour information for 4 of the fixtures into the programmer.
You could then “include” position information from another memory into
the programmer, and build up a new memory using information from
several existing memories.
Using Include
Press the Include button.
Select the fixtures from which you want to take settings. If you
don’t select any fixtures, all fixtures will be used.
Select the Attributes you want to include. The Dimmer attribute will
include all other attributes (the lights on the buttons show which
attributes will be loaded).
Press the Swop button for the memory you want to include.
The selected attributes of the selected fixtures will be loaded into
the programmer.
You can Include an entire memory by ensuring no fixtures are selected
and selecting the Dimmer attribute.
If the memory you are including contains shapes, the shapes and all
the fixtures they are applied to will be loaded, whether they are
selected or not.
Include is also useful when you are programming chases, which is
described in the next section.
6.11
Setting fade times for a memory
You can set a fade in and fade out time independently for every
memory. The fades only affect HTP (intensity) channels, and are set
using softkey C for fade in and D for fade out. There is also a separate
LTP timer which allows you to set movement times for fancy sweeps or
colour fades, set using softkey E.
Setting fade times for a memory
Press C [Edit Time].
Press the Swop button of the playback you want to set times for
The display shows you the times you can set.
Press C to set Fade In time, or D to set Fade Out time.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the new time. Press Enter to save
it.
Press Enter when you have finished. If you press Exit, the changes
you have made will not be stored.
There are some other timing functions available as well, which are
described in the reference manual.
6.12
Record by fixture, record by channel modes
Normally, if you change one attribute of a fixture, the Pearl records all
the other attributes of that fixture even if you haven’t changed those
attributes. So if you change the pan position, the Pearl will also record
the tilt, colour, gobo, iris, and so on. However, the Pearl also has a
more selective mode of operation where it only records the changed
attributes. You can choose the mode by holding down the Avo button
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
6. Memories - Page 33
and pressing Softkey C, then select option 2, [Rec by Fixture / Rec by
Channel]. The display shows the current setting of the option.
6.13
•
Record by fixture: This is the normal mode of the Pearl. It
means that when you record a memory, all attributes of every
fixture that you have changed are recorded in the memory. So if
you change only the position of a fixture, the colour, gobo,
intensity and all other attributes of that fixture are recorded as
well. This is useful because you know that when you recall the
memory, it will look exactly as it did when you saved it. However,
it can be slightly inflexible if you want to combine memories.
•
Record by channel: This means that only attributes you have
changed are recorded in the memory. So if you change the
position of a fixture, only the position is recorded. When you recall
the memory, the colour, gobo etc will remain as they were last
set. This means you can use a memory to change the position of
some fixtures while leaving the colour set from a previous
memory, allowing more variety when you are running a show. It is
a powerful feature but you can easily get yourself into trouble with
it, so you need to be sure which attributes you need to record and
which you want to “show through”. When you’re learning, it’s best
to have some memories “recorded by fixture” which turn on the
fixtures in a known state, then have some colour memories to
modify just the colour, or some gobo memories to set the gobo, or
other attributes.
Using shapes in memories
As you would expect, any shapes you have set up will be saved as part
of the memory. If you are using Record by Channel mode, there are
some interesting possibilities.
If you have changed the position of the fixture, then the new position
will be stored in the programmer. When you recall the memory, the
fixture will start the shape at the position you set in the memory.
If you have not changed the position of a fixture, when you recall the
memory the shape will run at whatever the current position of the
fixture is. This allows you to make a “shape only” memory which
overlays shapes on the current positioning of the fixtures.
6.14
Examples
How do I save my dimmer settings as a scene?
Press Clear to remove any changes you’ve made so far. Set the
dimmers as you want them using the faders. Press Memory. The free
playbacks will flash. Press one of the flashing Swop buttons to save the
scene in the playback.
Why don’t my Mac 600’s move to the position I’ve programmed
when I turn on a memory?
You have not pressed clear, and the Mac600’s are already positioned in
the programmer. The programmer overrides memories. If you press
Clear your memories should work.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 34 - 6. Memories
How do I save a memory using the positions from another
memory?
Select the fixtures you want to use with the Swop buttons. Press the
red Locate button to turn on the fixtures. Press Include, then the
Tilt/Pan attribute button. Press the Swop button of the memory whose
positions you want to use. The position information for the selected
fixtures will be recalled from the memory. Then save the memory by
pressing Memory and an empty (flashing) Swop button.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
7. Chases - Page 35
C H A P T E R
7.
S E V E N
Chases
In this chapter: how to record chases
•
explanation of chases
•
programming a chase
•
running a chase
•
setting speed and crossfade
•
stacks and sequence control
•
editing a chase
•
sound activation of chases
As well as being used for recalling static memories, the playback faders
on the Pearl can also be used for recalling chases. All the same page
select, copy and delete functions are available.
7.1
What is a chase?
A chase is simply a memory with a sequence of static positions. Each
position is known as a “step”. It is normally used to flash lights in a
sequence without you having to keep pressing buttons, or to move
fixtures around. Chases can run automatically, or by pressing a “Go”
button. If you are using the Pearl for theatrical lighting, you can use a
chase to store cues for a show. The Pearl also has a dedicated theatrical
lighting mode which has a section of its own.
Don’t get shapes confused with chases. A shape simply moves one
attribute of the fixture around in a pattern. A chase allows you to define
each attribute of the fixture in a step-by-step controlled manner.
However, you will find that using shapes saves you a lot of work, and
you won’t have to program as many chases as you would on a
conventional lighting desk.
7.2
Recording a chase
To program a chase, you have to set up the lighting state for each step
of the chase. You can either set all the fixtures and dimmers manually
for each step, or you can use Include to load in the information from
memories you have already recorded. Remember, if you just turn on a
memory, it does not go into the programmer and won’t get saved as
part of a chase step.
Note: From the July 2004 version of Pearl software, you can now use
shapes in a chase.
Programming a chase
Press the Chase button.
Press the Swop button of the playback where you
want to store the chase.
Press Clear, then set up the lighting for the first
step, either manually or by using “Include” on
existing memories (see page 31). You can save
Shapes in chase steps.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Chase button
Page 36 - 7. Chases
The display shows the step number
Press the playback Swop button to record the step. The
information from the programmer is stored as Step 1 of the chase.
Press Clear, set up the lighting for the second step, then press
Swop again to save step 2.
When you have saved as many steps as you want, press Clear,
then press Exit or Softkey F to finish.
If you don’t press Clear at the end of programming, the settings for the
last step will remain in the programmer and will override the chase
when you turn it on, so you won’t see the chase properly.
7.3
Running a chase
Running a chase is just like turning on a memory. Just raise the fader
and the chase will start to run.
The HTP (intensity) channels in the chase will be controlled by the
position of the fader. The other channels (LTP) will be set as soon as
the fader moves above zero. When in Run mode you can preload the
LTP channels to the first step by lowering the Add/Flash Master fader to
zero and pressing the Flash button of the
playback (this will ensure fixtures are correctly
set for the first step.)
The chase normally starts at step 1, and runs
forward. You can pause the chase and change
the direction of the chase using the Sequence
control buttons to the right of the wheels.
Sequence buttons
There are lots of options you can set which let
you do fancy things with chases, such as Random, One-shot, special
timing, and manual step mode. The details are in the reference manual.
7.4
Setting speed and crossfade
When you run a chase, the wheels are assigned to control the Speed
and Crossfade of the chase (crossfade is the “slope” between steps,
from instant switching to continuous fading). The display above the
wheels shows the step time and the crossfade setting.
You can save a speed with the chase, so that every time you play it
back, it runs at the same speed.
Saving chase speed
Turn on the chase you want, and set the speed to the setting you
want.
Press A [Chase Parameters].
Again press A [Save Speed]
The display will show “Saved”.
You can also save the current direction of the chase by pressing softkey
B.
If you are running several chases, the wheels are assigned to the most
recently selected chase. You can “connect” the wheels to one of the
other chases by pressing the Connect button to the right of the wheels,
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
7. Chases - Page 37
then the playback Swop button for the chase you want to connect to.
If you’ve changed the speed using the wheels and you want to go back
to the saved speed, press Connect then A [Clear temporary speed].
7.5
Naming chases
You can set a legend for chases in exactly the same way as you did for
a memory. In addition, you can label individual steps of a chase if you
are using the steps as cues. The reference manual tells you how to do
this.
Labelling a chase
Press D [Set Legend].
Press the Swop button of the playback you want to label.
Enter the label using the external QWERTY keyboard (the VDU
screen shows you what you are typing) and press Enter.
You can label another memory by pressing another Swop button,
or finish by pressing Exit.
7.6
Editing a chase using Unfold
The Pearl has a powerful chase editing system. The Unfold button
places each step of a chase on one of the playback faders, allowing you
to examine and edit each step individually as if it was a normal
memory.
Tiger: On the Pearl Tiger if your chase has more than 10 steps you will
not be able to access steps 11-15 on each page, unless you
plug in the Tiger Wing.
If your chase has more than 15 steps, you can swap to the next 15
steps using softkey F, or the previous 15 steps using softkey E.
Editing a chase using Unfold
Press the Unfold button (one of the blue command buttons)
Press the playback Swop button of the chase to be edited
The first 15 steps of the chase are loaded into playback faders 1-15
Raise a playback fader to view the contents of the step
The softkeys show a list of options which can be used for the step
To edit the contents of the step, make the changes then use
softkey A
To change the times of the step, use softkey B.
Press the Unfold button again to finish.
You can also edit chase steps while you are running the chase, without
using unfold. The “Rec Step” button allows you to record the current
programmer settings directly into the current step of the chase. This is
described in more detail in the reference manual.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 38 - 7. Chases
7.7
Copying a chase
Chases can be copied in exactly the same way as memories.
Copying a chase
Hold down the Flash button of the chase you want to copy.
Press the Swop button of the playback you want to store it in
You can change the Roller page while you are holding down the
Flash button, if you want to copy a chase to a different page.
The new chase will be a linked copy of the old one. If you want to
create a completely separate copy of the memory, press the Photocopy
button before you start the copy.
7.8
Deleting a chase
If you want to clear a chase:
Deleting a chase
Press Delete
Press the Swop button of the chase you want to delete
Press the Swop button again to confirm the delete.
7.9
Timing, Stacks and sequence control
The most common use of a chase is as an automatic continuous
sequence. However, the Pearl lets you step chases manually using the
Go button, which allows you to use them for theatrical lighting cues or
“One shot” chases. When you use a chase like this, it is sometimes
known as a “Stack”.
The Pearl has a dedicated theatrical lighting mode which is described in
detail in the next chapter.
Creating a stack
Save each cue state as a step in a chase.
Press C [Edit Times]
Press the playback Swop button for the chase
Press G [Links] to set LINK = OFF for the whole chase
Press Enter to save the setting.
Raise the playback fader to activate the chase.
Press the Go button to run each cue.
You can set the fade in and fade out times independently for each cue
using the Live Time button.
Setting cue times on a stack
Start the chase by raising the fader.
Press the Live Time button to set the times for the current cue.
Use softkeys A-G to set the times you want
Press Enter to save the settings or Exit to abandon them.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
7. Chases - Page 39
Press the Go button to go on to the next cue.
You can also set a text label for each cue. The Pearl will show you the
label for the current cue and the next one coming up. The reference
manual tells you more details about this.
7.10
Sound activation of chases
The Pearl can use bass, mid or treble (low, medium or high)
frequencies from its audio input to trigger chases. Any chase can be
programmed to respond to Bass, Mid or Treble frequency triggers.
There is also a master “Sound to light enable” option.
Sound mode only works with the key turned to Run, but you need to be
in Program mode to set up the chase for sound activation.
Sound activating chases
In Program mode, turn on the chase to “connect” it.
Press A [Chase Parameters]
Press E [Sound to light] to select Sound to Light Low, Medium or
High
Turn the key to Run mode.
Press E [Sound to light]. (This is the master sound to light enable
control) The option will highlight.
All chases with sound enabled will step in time to the sound signal
The Speed wheel controls the maximum speed of the chase
Press E, again, to turn off sound activation.
Also while in Run mode you can set the speed of the connected chase
manually by tapping Softkey G [Tap twice to set tempo] in time with
the music.
7.11
Examples
How do I program a dimmer chase?
Create the chase by pressing Chase then one of the flashing (empty)
playback swop buttons. Press Clear, and turn on the dimmers for step
1. Press the Swop button for the chase to save the step. Press clear,
then turn on the dimmers for step 2, and press the Swop button to
save. When you have saved all the steps, press Chase to end.
I’ve programmed a chase using memories but when I turn it on,
nothing happens
To use existing memories in a chase, you must use the Include function
to load the memory into the programmer. If you just turn on a memory
and then try and save that as a chase step, nothing will be saved
because the memory will not be in the programmer.
The last step of my chase doesn’t play back
You need to press Clear to clear the programmer (which overrides the
chase output).
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 40 - 7. Chases
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
8. Theatre stack - Page 41
C H A P T E R
8.
E I G H T
Theatre stack
In this chapter: the Pearl’s theatre mode
•
Setting theatre mode
•
Theatre controls
•
Plotting a cue
•
Naming a cue
•
Setting fade times for a cue
•
Jumping to a cue
•
Running the show
Theatre mode makes the Pearl behave like a standard theatrical
console, allowing you to program your whole show as a sequence of
cues, and play it back just by pressing the Go button. Playback faders
12-15 become dedicated cue masters. The rest of the console continues
to operate as normal, so you can run the main cues from the theatre
mode, and spot effects from the other playback faders.
Tiger: On the Pearl Tiger, faders 12-15 on the optional Fader Wing are
used as the Theatre Masters. If you do not have the optional
Wing, you can change internal links to use playbacks 7-10 as
the cue masters. See page 212 for details of the links.
8.1
Setting theatre stack mode
In program mode, select Softkey B [Theatre stack programming], then
press Enter.
Note:
When theatre mode is enabled, you can’t access playbacks 1215 on any page; if you intend to use Theatre mode it is
advisable not to program these playbacks. Any programs are
kept and when you turn off Theatre mode you will be able to
access them again.
You can get out of the Theatre menu by pressing G [Quit]. The Exit
button does not operate in this mode.
To turn off theatre mode completely, press softkey B from the main
menu then press D [Exit theatre programming] When Theatre mode is
enabled, the swop button of Playback 12 flashes when the playback is
turned off.
Theatre mode programming is not deleted when theatre mode is turned
off.
8.2
Theatre controls
Fader 12 is the Master fader, controlling the overall intensity of all
lights.
The Go button next to the wheels makes a cue start.
If you stop a fade part-way by pressing the Stop button, or one of the
stop buttons above the faders, then Fader 13 controls the Fade In of
the next step, fader 14 controls the Fade Out of the previous step, and
fader 15 controls the LTP (movement) fade timer.
The buttons above 13, 14 and 15 are Stop (blue) and Go (grey) buttons
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 42 - 8. Theatre stack
for each of these functions.
8.3
Plotting a cue
You can set up the levels for a cue either by using the preset faders and
control wheels to set the levels you want, or by typing in the channel
number and the level. You can store moving light positions in theatre
cues as well as dimmers.
Entering dimmer levels
Press Channel (at the top of the numeric keys)
On the numeric keypad, enter the fader/handle number of the
dimmer (not the DMX address of the channel)
Press G [At %]
Enter the value to be set as 0 – 9, or Softkey G for Full. You can
enter a decimal point and another number if you want more
accurate level control.
The channel you entered will be set to the level you entered.
Press the Channel button to go back to the normal menu
The softkeys offer you a few more options such as up by 5%, down by
5%, blackout.
Pressing Clear will take all channels you’ve set using the keypad to
blackout. Any channels turned on using the faders will stay on, but will
be removed from the programmer.
You can also set multiple channels to the same level using F [through].
Enter first channel, “through”, last channel, “at %”, level.
Entering multiple dimmer levels
Press Channel
On the numeric keypad, enter the first dimmer handle number of
the range
Press F [Through]
Enter the last dimmer handle number of the range
Press G [At %]
Enter the value to be set as 0 – 9, or.Softkey G for Full.
The channels you entered will all be set to the level you entered.
When you have set all the levels as you want them, type the cue
number, then press D [Record Menu]. You then need to press B
[Record Stage] to record all the intensity channels that are currently
turned on, plus anything in the programmer, or D [Record
Programmer] to record just the contents of the programmer (i.e. what
you have manually changed). The cue will be saved.
It’s best to use whole numbers for cues. Then if you need to insert a
cue between two existing cues, you can use a fractional number in
between. The Pearl will automatically increase the cue number by 1
every time you record a cue.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
8. Theatre stack - Page 43
8.4
Naming a cue
Type the step number to be named, then press E [Set Legend]. Enter
the legend on the QWERTY keyboard. While you are typing, the input is
shown on the VDU screen.
The name of the live cue and the next cue is displayed in the cue list on
the VDU screen.
8.5
Setting fade times for a cue
You can set fade in, fade out and “wait” times for each cue. Press C
[Set Times] to show the options. This will set the times for the current
cue. You can also use the “Live Time” and “Next Time” buttons (to the
right of the wheels) to set the times for the current and next cues. See
page 166 for details of times.
8.6
Jumping to a cue
You can change the cue being edited by typing the cue number then
pressing Enter. If you want to output this cue, press F [Cut to Live]
(fade times are ignored).
8.7
Running the show
If you have just been editing, you may need to type 1 then Softkey F to
set the console to cue 1.
The display above the control wheels shows the current cue number,
the next cue number, and the progress of the wait and fade times for
fade in, fade out and LTP.
For automatic cues, you can simply press
the Go button next to the wheels. The
console will carry out the fade with the
times you programmed.
If you want to manually control a fade,
you can use the in, out and LTP faders or
Go/Stop buttons to operate the cue. The
display just above wheel A shows the
percentage of fade (9 - 0) left to go
(shown as “5” in the picture). When Fade
In, Fade Out and LTP all show “0”, the
console moves on to the next cue.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
In HTP fade
cue numbers
Out HTP fade
LTP fade
Page 44 - 8. Theatre stack
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
9. The graphics tablet - Page 45
C H A P T E R
9.
N I N E
The graphics tablet
In this chapter: using the graphics tablet with the Pearl
•
Using the tablet
•
Functions available on the tablet
The graphics tablet is an accessory to the Pearl. On “Touring” versions
of the Pearl it is fitted to the right of the console in the flight case. It
allows you to use a pen to select fixtures, groups, colours, and position
the fixtures by simply drawing with the pen. You will be amazed how
much easier your programming and show operating becomes when you
use the graphics tablet.
The graphics tablet needs to be plugged into the serial port of the unit,
and User Setting 7 (press AVO and Softkey C) needs to be set to “G
Tablet.
9.1
Using the tablet
To use the tablet, you simply press the pen onto it. The button on the
side of the pen doesn’t do anything. A quick press is like pushing a
button on the Pearl. You can also draw on the tablet by keeping the pen
pressed down while moving it. This is used to move fixtures or change
attributes.
The tablet has a paper overlay on it with pads which simulate various
buttons on the Pearl. You can write your fixture names, group names,
attributes, palette entries and even draw your stage layout on the
overlay so that you know what’s what. Spare overlays are available
from Avolites.
The Pearl will behave as if you are pressing buttons on it in the normal
way, so the LEDs and the displays will change as you use the tablet.
Many of the functions of the Pearl are quicker and easier using the
tablet. Sometimes you might find it easier to do part of the function on
the tablet and part on the console. The end result is the same.
Position control
Attributes
Groups
Palettes
Fixtures
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Colour control
Page 46 - 9. The graphics tablet
9.2
Functions available on the tablet
To select a fixture or a group, just press the pen onto one of the fixture
pads or group pads. The first 60 fixtures are available on the tablet.
Only the first 30 groups are available on the tablet. The Swop button
LEDs on the handles will light up to show you which fixtures are
selected, as if you had pressed the actual console buttons.
You can control the position of the fixture by drawing on the Stage area
of the tablet.
You can “train” the Pearl so that it knows how all the lights are set up.
Then when you point at the stage area of the tablet, all the lights will
point at the same place on the stage. This is called “Tracking mode”.
The Reference manual tells you how to do this and how to use tracking
mode.
If you press the pen on the Nudge pad, when you draw on the tablet
the fixture will move relative to its current position. This can be useful if
you want to slightly reposition a fixture. Press on the Absolute pad to
turn off this mode.
You can control the intensity of the selected fixtures by drawing on the
Dimmer area.
If the fixture can do CMY colour mixing, you can set the colour by
drawing in the colour mix area of the tablet (you will need to set the
Luminosity on the luminosity slider to maximum).
You can recall the first 60 palette entries by pressing the pen on the
Focuses pads.
You can change individual attributes of selected fixtures by pressing the
pen on to one of the attribute pads, then (without lifting the pen)
drawing up and down on the tablet. The attribute lights on the console
will come on to show you which attribute is selected.
On the right hand side of the tablet, a range of pads make some of the
programmer functions available, such as Clear and Locate Fixtures. You
can also record groups and memories using the tablet exactly as if you
were pressing buttons on the console. The details are in the reference
manual.
The “Fixtures or Mimics” pad allows you to set whether the LEDs in the
Swop buttons show you which fixtures are selected, or the intensity of
the channel.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
10. Running your show - Page 47
C H A P T E R
T E N
10. Running your show
In
•
•
•
•
•
10.1
this chapter: running your show with the Pearl
Showtime
Run modes
Master faders
Channel mimics
Manual control during a show
It’s showtime…
When you have finished programming (or you’ve run out of time) and
it’s showtime, the most important thing is to back up the show to disk
(see end of section 2 on page 12 for instructions). Having done that,
turn the key to Run. This means you can’t accidentally change your
programming when you get into a button-pressing frenzy.
10.2
Temporarily locking the console
In Run mode you can temporarily lock the console (to stop the sound
guys playing with it while you nip to the loo). Type in a 4 digit number
then press C [Lock Desk] then Enter. The display will show the code.
Press Enter to lock it. All buttons and faders are now ignored. Re-enter
the code to unlock the console.
If you repower or reset the Pearl, the lock is cancelled. It’s just to
discourage tampering.
10.3
Run modes
When you are running a show, there are two modes available to you,
normal Run mode, which just allows you to play back memories, and
Takeover run mode, which allows you to play back memories and also
take manual control of fixtures. The mode also affects how the Swop
and Flash buttons on the console operate.
You can select the mode by pressing A [Toggle mode]. The mode is
shown on the top line of the display.
•
What’s not affected: The playback faders work the same in either
mode. The Preset Faders work as handles to control the intensity of
the device they are patched to.
•
Normal Run mode: the Flash and Swop buttons on the handles and
playbacks work as flash buttons. The “Flash” button adds the function
into anything else which is on. The “Swop” button turns on the
function, but turns off everything else while the button is held down.
The programmer is cleared and you can’t manually control any LTP
channels.
•
Takeover run mode: the Swop buttons on the handles allow you to
select dimmers or fixtures for manual control. This lets you add to or
change your programming in real time during the show. The faders still
control the intensity of the dimmers and fixtures. The Flash and Swop
buttons on the playbacks are disabled.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 48 - 10. Running your show
10.4
Manual control during a show (“busking”)
If you have not had as much programming time as you would have
liked, you might need to make up some additional effects during the
show. This is sometimes called “busking”.
You can create instant variations by recalling palette values to modify
your existing programs. The Pearl can fade to the palette values for
added effect.
You need to be in Takeover Run mode to do any of this .
Fading palettes over time in Run mode
Select some fixtures which are already in use on stage
Press “2” (or any time, in seconds) on the numeric keypad
Press the Focus button
Select the Colour palette page
Press a softkey to recall a different colour from the Colour palette
The selected fixtures will change to the new colour over a time of 2
seconds.
If you don’t select any fixtures in the first step, the palette value will be
applied to all fixtures (if this is enabled in User Setting 6, see page
195).
To save having to select fixtures, you can apply the palette to all
fixtures in a memory.
Setting a palette value to fixtures in a memory
Press the Focus button
Select the Colour palette page
Hold down a softkey for a different colour from the Colour palette
Press the Swop button of the memory you want to use
Release the softkey
The palette value will be set to all the fixtures in the memory.
You can apply this palette to fade over a time by pressing a number
before you press the Focus button.
If you apply palettes over a time, they do not get put in the
programmer. This means that the next time you turn on a playback,
the new playback settings will override the old palette.
If you apply palettes with time=0, then they do go into the
programmer, and the palette value will override any new playbacks
until you press Clear. If you want to apply the palette instantly, but
don’t want it in the programmer (so that turning on a new playback will
override the palette), enter a time of 0.1.
You can also change the position of fixtures; the easiest way to do this
is to use “Nudge” on the graphics tablet. This allows you to sweep
selected fixtures around their programmed position by drawing with the
pen, so you can alter the height of a chase or shape in real time.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
10. Running your show - Page 49
You can use “Record by channel” mode when programming to set some
memories to only affect position, and other memories to set colours,
gobos, add shapes, and so on. By combining two or more memories
you can produce a much wider range of effects than if all your
memories set all the attributes. However, for this to work well you need
to make sure you know what attribute is going to be affected by each
memory, as if you turn on two “colour only” memories then nothing is
going to light up.
10.5
Master faders
In the bottom left hand corner of the console are the Master Faders.
These allow overall intensity control of the whole console.
•
The Add/Flash and Swop masters control the intensity of the Flash
and Swop buttons on the playbacks.
•
The Preset Master controls the overall intensity of any channels
turned on in the Preset faders.
•
The Grand Master controls the intensity of all output from the
console.
Tiger: The Pearl Tiger does not have an Add/Flash master.
10.6
Channel mimics
If you are in normal Run mode, the LEDs on each handle mimic the
intensity of the fixture or dimmer controlled by that handle (i.e. they
are lit if it is turned on).
If you are in Takeover Run mode (or Program mode), you can choose
between “Mimic” mode or “Fixture” mode, where the LEDs show you
which fixtures are selected for manual control.
You select the mode by holding down the Avo button and pressing
Softkey A. The button shows “Preset LEDs = Fixtures” (or mimics)
depending on the mode. You can also change this mode using the
Graphics Tablet.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 50 - 10. Running your show
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
11. Advanced features - Page 51
C H A P T E R
E L E V E N
11. Advanced features
Hopefully, by working through this tutorial manual, you now know how
to set up the Pearl, control fixtures with it, save memories and chases
and use them in a show.
We have tried to stick to the basics, but the Pearl can do many more
things than we have told you so far. The reference manual expands on
all the information in the previous chapters. There’s also some subjects
we have not touched on yet, and these are described in the reference
manual. Just so you know, they are:
•
User Settings - Some console options you can change
•
Setting the real time clock
•
Disk functions
•
Tracking - You can train the Pearl so it knows how the fixtures are
positioned relative to the stage. You can then point all the fixtures
at one part of the stage by clicking on the graphics tablet. Training
is described in Chapter 3.2 of the reference manual and use of the
graphics tablet in tracking mode is described in Chapter 9.
•
MIDI - The Pearl has a very comprehensive MIDI control system
•
Script files - You can tell the Pearl how to run a show from a list of
instructions which you can enter or record in real time. This is
described in chapter 10 of the reference manual.
•
Changing the operating system - From time to time Avolites release
a new version of operating software, which you can load into the
Pearl
•
Personality files - if the Pearl doesn’t have a personality file for your
fixture you can write your own. These are described in chapter 11
of the reference manual.
•
Devious hardware tricks for wiping the console
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 52 - 11. Advanced features
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
12. Introduction to intelligent lighting - Page 53
C H A P T E R
T W E L V E
12. Introduction to intelligent lighting
This section is for those who have not used intelligent lighting much
before, who are put off by dip switches, lights that move unexpectedly
and strange digital control systems that fly down microphone cables.
12.1
Ordinary lighting
Standard lighting consists of a variety of light bulbs connected to
dimmers. The lights may be anything from par cans to theatrical
lanterns, and the dimmer controls the intensity of the light. A typical
controller for standard lighting has a set of sliders, and each slider
controls the intensity of one dimmer using a low-voltage control signal
of 0 to 10 volts. The standard way to link the sliders to the dimmers is
by using a multicore cable with one core for each dimmer channel.
12.2
So what is intelligent lighting?
Intelligent lighting usually contains more functions than just intensity; a
typical intelligent light, often called a “fixture”, can also change colour,
project different patterns (called “gobos”) and direct the light beam in
any direction using a movable mirror or by motorised control of the
light unit itself. The fixtures are called “intelligent” because they contain
a small computer which controls the movement of the internal motors
in response to the control signals. Some fixtures can also listen to
music and produce their own light show, sometimes synchronising
themselves with other intelligent fixtures. However they are actually
not all that intelligent and usually need a user to make them do
something interesting.
12.3
How do you control it?
Each function of an intelligent fixture requires its own control signal, so
the user can select the colour, position, gobo etc. You can use 0 to 10
volt control signals on some fixtures, but the cable carrying the control
signals again has to be a multicore with one core for each function, so
each fixture might need 8 or more cores in the control cable. Some of
the more complicated fixtures use 20 channels.
When several fixtures are used, the number of cores needed in the
control cable soon becomes large. The cable also has to split at each
fixture. It all gets a bit complicated.
12.4
The DMX control system
Fortunately, there is an easy to use system for controlling intelligent
lighting and dimmers. It is called DMX-512, which stands for Digital
MultipleX, and it sends up to 512 control signals down a twisted pair
screened cable. The cable can be simply daisy-chained from each
fixture to the next. Microphone-style XLR connectors are usually used,
sometimes 3-pin and sometimes 5-pin. More recently RJ45 computer
network type connectors are being used.
The DMX system sends out the level for channel 1, followed by the level
for channel 2, then 3, then 4 and so on, all the way up to a maximum
of 512 (though not all DMX systems send out all the channels). It then
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 54 - 12. Introduction to intelligent lighting
goes back to channel 1 again. All the units connected to the DMX
receive all the channels, and you tell them which channels to respond
to by setting the “base channel” or “DMX address” on each unit. The
computer inside the fixture waits for the correct channels to come up,
then reads in the levels for those channels.
Dimmers can also understand DMX; some dimmers can read it directly,
others use a demultiplexer or “demux” to convert the DMX into the
normal 0 to 10 volt analogue signals they are used to.
12.5
Moving light control desks
Sliders are ideal for controlling dimmers. More complicated dimmer
control desks have memories to record the level of all the dimmers, so
you can recall a setting without having to set all the sliders again during
a show.
However, once you start controlling lights that move and change colour,
sliders become less ideal, because it is the movement rather than the
end level which is important. Dedicated moving light desks such as the
Pearl include many helpful functions which makes the programming of
intelligent lighting much easier, such as palettes of pre-programmed
colours and positions, and a shape generator to create movements.
12.6
A few cautions about using DMX
DMX is a robust system which normally works very well, but sometimes
it can be problematic. Here are a few tips for making DMX work well.
•
DMX cabling should be twisted-pair data cable. Microphone cable is
not recommended because it doesn’t transmit the signal as well.
You will probably get away with it, but equally you might have
problems.
•
Always ensure the last fixture in the DMX line is terminated. On
some fixtures this can be done by flipping a switch, others are selfterminating, but often you will have to fit a terminating plug into
the vacant socket on the last unit. This has a 120 ohm resistor
across the DMX line and prevents data interference on the line. It
might work without but…
•
Don’t split the DMX cable. Loop it from one unit to the next. If you
have to split it, use a proper active splitter unit.
•
The DMX specification says that you should not run more than 32
fixtures from one DMX line unless the fixtures are buffered or
optically isolated. Either use several DMX lines (the Pearl has four)
or use a DMX repeater unit. In practice, most fixtures do not put
maximum loading on the DMX line and you will probably get away
with using more if you have to, but the DMX signal may be weaker
than it should be.
•
Don’t run your DMX lines near high voltage cables or neon. They
may pick up interference which will stop the system working, or
worse, blow up the receiver electronics in the fixtures (this really
does happen, and usually at the most inconvenient moment).
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
13. Introduction to Avolites consoles - Page 55
C H A P T E R
T H I R T E E N
13. Introduction to Avolites consoles
If you have used intelligent lighting before, this section explains the
thinking behind how Avolites consoles work and tells you what
everything is called.
13.1
Operating the console
The console has three main modes, set using the keyswitch; these are
Program (used for programming a show, allows everything to be
changed), Run (used when running a show, allows limited user
override but no changes to programming) and System (used for
configuring the console).
The operation of the console is based around the LCD screen. Seven
Softkeys allow you to select the options down the right hand side of
the screen. These options change depending on what the console is
doing. In addition there are the blue Command Buttons which give onebutton access to some functions.
13.2
Controlling lights
To an Avolites console, a light is either a Dimmer (single intensity
control channel) or a Fixture (Multiple control channels)
All Fixtures have a Personality File which tells the console how to
control the fixture. You don’t need to know how the fixture works, you
just tell the console what you want to do with the fixture (such as
change colour) and it knows which controls to change to get the effect.
You tell the console what fixtures/dimmers you have and their DMX
addresses by Patching them. When you patch, you allocate a Handle
to the device. The handle is one of the Faders and Select buttons across
the top of the console. You can allocate several dimmers to one handle
if you want to group them, but only one fixture can be allocated to any
one handle.
To control a fixture, you need to select the fixture you want to control
by pressing the Select button of the handle. The button lights up to tell
you that the fixture/dimmer is selected.
Additionally you can control a dimmer, or the intensity of a fixture,
using the Fader of the handle. If you change pages so that the fader
has been controlling something else, you will need to Match the fader
to the current dimmer level before it operates the dimmer (normally by
lowering the fader to zero then fading it up until you gain control of the
dimmer).
All control of fixtures uses the two Wheels. To change the fixture(s)
you’ve selected, you select the Attribute (colour, pan, gobo etc) you
want to control using the buttons on the right hand side of the console.
Then turn the wheels to change the attribute.
13.3
Programming the console
To store the settings of fixtures and dimmers, the console provides
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 56 - 13. Introduction to Avolites consoles
Memories and Chases (sequences). These are stored in the 15
Playback Faders across the near edge of the console. Up to 30
different Pages of playbacks are available using the Roller and Roller
Page buttons. The roller provides a handy surface for writing a note of
what is stored in each playback.
When you save a memory or chase, the console only saves settings you
have changed using the wheels (it does not save the current output
state). Whenever you change a fixture using the wheels and attribute
buttons, your changes are stored in a special memory called the
Programmer. The console allows you to save just the changed
attributes (Record by Channel), or if you change one attribute of a
fixture it can save all other attributes of that fixture as well (Record by
Fixture). Record by Channel mode is often called “Tracking” on other
consoles; in this mode, fixture attributes remain in their last state
unless you specifically change them.
The programmer records all changes in the console until you press the
Clear button. You should press the Clear button before setting up the
lighting for a memory, otherwise there may be all sorts of changes you
don’t want in the programmer, which would end up in your memory.
You can reload information from memories and chases into the
programmer, if you want to save them in another memory, using the
Include function. This function allows you to reload the whole memory,
or only certain fixtures from the memory, or only certain attributes of
certain fixtures.
When you play back a memory or chase, the console sets the fixtures
to their programmed positions as soon as the fader rises above zero.
The intensity of the fixtures, and any dimmers, rises with the fader. The
intensity channels are called HTP (highest takes precedence) channels,
because if the channel is turned on in more than one memory, the
highest level will be output. The movement channels are called LTP
(latest takes precedence) channels, because if the channel is turned on
in more than one memory, the most recent change will be output.
You can program the LTP/movement channels to fade with the fader if
you want to.
Avolites consoles have a Shape Generator (sometimes called an
effects generator on other consoles). This automatically changes
attributes in a preprogrammed pattern. Fixtures can be made to move
their light beams around in a circle, or to fade colours, or move in and
out of focus. When a shape is applied to more than one fixture, the
shape can be Spread so that the fixtures run through in a sequence
giving wave-type effects.
Shapes you apply go into the programmer and are saved if you save a
memory or a chase.
Avolites consoles allow you to save frequently-used positions, colours
etc. into a Palette (sometimes called a Focus or Preset Focus on other
consoles). When you want that setting, you simply recall the palette. If
you use palettes when programming memories, the console remembers
the palette number rather than the actual fixture settings. This means
that if you change venues, or fixtures are moved, you can quickly
reprogram your position palettes and all memories using those palettes
will be updated. This can save you having to reprogram many
memories.
Palettes can be recalled from a menu on the console display so you can
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
13. Introduction to Avolites consoles - Page 57
see what colour, position etc. you are going to get. This is useful when
“busking” the lighting (modifying your programming) during a show.
The console allows you to fade between palettes (Timed Palettes) to
give smooth live changes.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 58 - 13. Introduction to Avolites consoles
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
14. Changes in the latest Pearl software - Page 59
C H A P T E R
F O U R T E E N
14. Changes in the latest Pearl software
If you are used to using the Avolites Pearl console, this section gives
you a quick rundown of the differences between the Pearl you know
and love and the new version of software. There are some exciting new
features.
14.1
USB disk drives
The Pearl 2008 software now allows you to save and load show files,
personality files and system software from a USB pen drive. An internal
USB disk is also provided for storing personality files, and this also
stores show backups and can be used to save show data.
14.2
Wheel acceleration
16 bit attributes now always work in 16 bit mode. If you spin the
wheels faster, the Pearl will skip values to change the attribute faster.
If you spin the wheels slowly the attribute will change with maximum
resolution.
14.3
Preset Focuses are now Palettes
Preset Focuses are now called Palettes, in line with other Avolites
consoles (except for the “Focus” button, which remains stubbornly
engraved).
You can now recall Palettes from the softkeys by pressing the Focus
button and the display shows you what the palette contains. This is
similar to the Palette displays on the Sapphire, if you’re used to that
console.
You can apply a palette to all fixtures, without having to select them. If
you recall a palette with no fixtures selected it will be applied to all
fixtures (but the palette is not entered into the programmer).
You can apply a palette to all fixtures in a memory, by holding down
the button for the palette and then pressing the memory’s Swop
button. Again the palette is not entered into the programmer.
Each page of fixtures now has a separate page of palettes accessible
from the handle “Flash” buttons. (previously the same 30
palettes/focuses appeared on all fixture pages). This option needs to be
enabled in the user settings, see page 201.
14.4
Chases can include shapes
You can now include shapes in a chase and in cues of the Theatre
Stack. Each step can include different shape settings. If the shape is
also present with unchanged parameters in the next step, it will
continue, otherwise it will stop at the end of the step time.
14.5
Intelligent Attribute display
The display above the wheels can now show the attribute value name;
for example, on a colour wheel you may see “Open”, “Red” etc
displayed as you turn the wheel.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 60 - 14. Changes in the latest Pearl software
This function requires Range information to be supported by the
personality file for the fixture. If an updated personality file including
the Range information becomes available, there is a function to update
the Range table for the patched personalities in the console, so you
don’t have to repatch. This is in the Utilities section of the System
menu.
14.6
Legends
You can enter legends for memories, chases, groups, roller pages,
palette pages and palette entries. Memory and chase legends are
shown on the VDU screen, the other legends are used on both the VDU
screen and the on-board LCD display.
14.7
Sound to light
Any chase can be triggered by low, mid or high frequency sound from
the audio input (previously this was fixed to chases 1 2 and 3). Chases
can be set to trigger on a given beat out of a number of beats, e.g. on
the 2nd beat of every 4 beats.
14.8
Other features
You can temporarily lock out the controls the desk in Run mode by
typing a 4 digit code and pressing Softkey C.
The Include function has been improved to allow you to include a chase
step, a cue from the theatre stack, and incoming DMX from the DMX In
socket.
A dedicated Locate button has been added using the Red button on the
bottom right corner (previously Reduce Fixture Intensity). The Reduce
Intensity function is still available by pressing this button with the AVO
button. The previous “Locate Fixture” function (ML Menu then Softkey
A) still works as well.
A “locate no pan and tilt” option has been added to allow you to locate
a fixture without changing its position.
Many options are now quickly accessible by holding down the AVO
button.
You can selectively Wipe parts of the console; just the programming,
just the palettes, the patch and the programming, or the original
Wipeall option.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Pearl 2008
Pearl Tiger
Reference Manual
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
R E F E R E N C E
1.
2.
3.
4.
M A N U A L
C O N T E N T S
SETTING UP THE CONSOLE
109
1.1 Connecting up
1.1.1
Connecting mains power
1.1.2
Connecting DMX lines
1.1.3
Connecting MIDI devices
1.1.4
Connecting audio
1.1.5
Other back panel connections and controls
1.1.6
The desk lamp
109
109
109
110
110
110
111
1.2 Operating
1.2.1
Operating modes
1.2.2
Saving to and loading from disk
1.2.3
The front panel controls
1.2.4
View screens
1.2.5
Pearl Tiger
111
111
111
112
113
115
PATCHING
117
2.1 Create
2.1.1
Fixture handles
2.1.2
Patching dimmers
2.1.3
Patching moving light fixtures
2.1.4
Checking the patching
117
117
118
118
120
2.2 Edit
2.2.1
2.2.2
121
121
121
Changing the DMX address of a fixture
Moving a fixture to a different handle
2.3 Delete
2.3.1
Deleting a patched fixture
121
121
2.4 Advanced options
2.4.1
Patch Utilities
122
122
CONTROLLING DIMMERS AND FIXTURES
125
3.1 Create
3.1.1
Selecting fixtures and dimmers for control
3.1.2
Changing attributes of the selected fixtures
3.1.3
Selecting attributes from the softkeys
3.1.4
Using groups
3.1.5
Stepping through selected fixtures one at a time
3.1.6
The Align and Flip functions
3.1.7
“Killing off” a fixture or dimmer
3.1.8
Entering intensity levels as numbers
3.1.9
Controlling fixtures by entering values
3.1.10
Fan mode
125
125
126
127
127
127
128
129
129
130
131
3.2 Advanced options
3.2.1
The ML menu and Tracking
3.2.2
Training the console for Tracking mode
131
131
132
PALETTES
4.1 Create
4.1.1
Palette values stored as a reference
4.1.2
Shared and individual palettes
4.1.3
Which attributes are stored in palettes
4.1.4
Storing a palette
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
135
135
135
135
135
136
5.
4.2 Playback
4.2.1
Recalling a palette value
4.2.2
Palette pages
4.2.3
Setting a palette to all fixtures (Quick palette)
4.2.4
Recalling only some attributes from a palette
4.2.5
Setting a palette to fixtures in a memory (Filtered palette)
136
136
137
137
138
138
4.3 Edit
4.3.1
4.3.2
4.3.3
138
138
138
139
Editing and deleting palettes
Naming a palette value or page
Viewing the contents of a palette
4.4 Timing
4.4.1
Recalling a palette with a fade time
4.4.2
Master fade time
139
139
140
4.5 Advanced options
4.5.1
Palette options
140
140
SHAPES
5.1 Playback
5.1.1
Selecting a shape
5.1.2
Changing the size and speed of a shape
5.1.3
Spreading a shape across multiple fixtures
5.1.4
Relative and Absolute shapes
141
141
142
142
143
5.2 Edit
5.2.1
143
143
Editing shapes which are running
5.3 Advanced options
5.3.1
Shape options
5.3.2
Updating the shape file
6.
141
MEMORIES
144
144
145
147
6.1 Create
6.1.1
How the Pearl works when programming
6.1.2
Creating a memory
6.1.3
Recording the stage using Snapshots
6.1.4
Using shapes in memories
6.1.5
Viewing the programmer contents
147
147
148
149
149
150
6.2 Playback
6.2.1
HTP and LTP channels
6.2.2
Playing back a memory
6.2.3
Changing playback pages
150
150
151
151
6.3 Edit
6.3.1
6.3.2
6.3.3
6.3.4
151
151
152
153
154
Editing a memory
The Include function
The “Off” button
Viewing a memory
6.4 Copy
6.4.1
Copying a memory
154
154
6.5 Delete
6.5.1
Deleting a memory
155
155
6.6 Timing
6.6.1
Setting fade times for a memory
155
155
6.7 Advanced options
6.7.1
Recording in Blind mode
156
156
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
7.
8.
9.
CHASES
159
7.1 Create
7.1.1
Programming a chase
159
159
7.2 Playback
7.2.1
Running a chase
7.2.2
Connecting a chase to the controls
7.2.3
Setting speed, crossfade and direction
7.2.4
Manually controlling the chase steps
7.2.5
Viewing chase steps
160
160
160
160
161
162
7.3 Edit
7.3.1
7.3.2
7.3.3
7.3.4
162
162
162
163
164
Adding more steps to the end of a chase
Inserting steps into a chase
Editing a chase using Unfold
Editing a chase which is running
7.4 Copy
7.4.1
Copying chases
164
164
7.5 Delete
7.5.1
Deleting chases
7.5.2
Deleting a step from a chase
165
165
165
7.6 Timing
7.6.1
Speed and crossfade controlled by wheels
7.6.2
Setting global step or fade times and unlinking
7.6.3
Setting times and links for individual steps
7.6.4
Viewing timing information
7.6.5
Sound activation of chases
165
165
165
166
167
167
7.7 Advanced options
7.7.1
Chase options
168
168
THEATRE STACK
171
8.1 Create
8.1.1
Setting theatre stack mode
8.1.2
Theatre controls
8.1.3
Plotting a cue
8.1.4
Running a chase or memory with a cue (Autoload)
8.1.5
Naming a cue
171
171
171
172
173
173
8.2 Timing
8.2.1
Setting fade times for a cue
8.2.2
Displaying the cue timings
173
173
174
8.3 Playback
8.3.1
Running a theatrical show
175
175
8.4 Edit
8.4.1
8.4.2
8.4.3
8.4.4
8.4.5
176
176
176
176
176
176
Editing a cue
Jumping to a cue
Inserting a cue
Renumbering cues
Copying a cue
8.5 Delete
8.5.1
Deleting a cue
176
176
8.6 Advanced options
8.6.1
Advanced theatre options
177
177
THE GRAPHICS TABLET
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
179
9.1 Create
9.1.1
Connecting the tablet
9.1.2
Using the tablet
9.1.3
Selecting fixtures on the tablet
9.1.4
Changing the position of the fixtures
9.1.5
Changing colours and other attributes
9.1.6
Recalling palette entries (focuses)
9.1.7
Storing palette entries (focuses)
9.1.8
Programming functions on the tablet
9.1.9
Tablet status on the VDU monitor
180
180
180
180
180
181
181
181
181
182
9.2 Advanced options
9.2.1
Extending the tablet cable
182
182
10. RUNNING THE SHOW
183
10.1
Playback
10.1.1
Run modes
10.1.2
Master faders
10.1.3
Manual control during a show (“Busking”)
183
183
183
184
10.2
Options
10.2.1
Two-preset mode
10.2.2
Temporarily locking the console
10.2.3
Channel mimics
185
185
185
185
11. AUTOMATED PLAYBACK (SCRIPT FILES)
187
11.1
Create
11.1.1
Recording Script files
11.1.2
What is recorded in the script file
187
187
188
11.2
Playback
11.2.1
Selecting a script file for testing
11.2.2
Testing the script file
11.2.3
Using Script files in Run mode
11.2.4
Looping and running script files on power up
188
188
188
189
190
11.3
Edit
11.3.1
The script file edit display
11.3.2
Editing an action
11.3.3
Inserting a step into the script file
11.3.4
“On-the-fly” editing
190
190
191
191
191
11.4
Timing
11.4.1
Editing a timecode
11.4.2
Changing timecode for a group of steps
11.4.3
Changing the start timecode for the whole script file
11.4.4
Sorting the steps into time order
191
191
192
192
192
11.5
Copy
11.5.1
Copying a script file
193
193
11.6
Delete
11.6.1
Deleting a step
11.6.2
Deleting a script file
193
193
193
11.7
193
Options
12. SETUP
12.1
User Settings
12.1.1
The User Settings menu
12.1.2
Setting the Wheel acceleration
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
195
195
195
197
12.2
User functions
12.2.1
The Wipe menu
12.2.2
Disk functions
12.2.3
USB drive troubleshooting
13. OTHER FEATURES
197
197
197
198
201
13.1
System Configuration
13.1.1
Utility menu
13.1.2
USB Stick Options
13.1.3
Service mode
13.1.4
AVOS2 functions
13.1.5
Upgrading earlier Pearl software to Pearl 2008 version
13.1.6
Installing the latest Pearl application software
13.1.7
Installing new fixture personalities
13.1.8
Troubleshooting an Invalid License
13.1.9
Hardware WIPEALL mode
13.1.10
Audio gain links
201
201
201
203
204
204
205
206
206
206
207
13.2
MIDI functions
13.2.1
What a MIDI command looks like
13.2.2
MIDI commands used by the Pearl
13.2.3
MIDI Time Code
13.2.4
MIDI Problems
209
209
209
210
210
13.3
The stage remote (riggers remote)
211
13.4
Pearl Tiger: installing the Tiger Wing
212
13.5
Pearl Tiger: Theatre Cue Master jumper links
14. THE PERSONALITY FILE SYSTEM
14.1
Help, I can’t find a personality for my fixture
14.2
Create
14.2.1
What is and how do I write or change a Personality file?
14.2.2
Personality file naming conventions
14.2.3
Personality File Keyword Order
14.2.4
The Instrument Name
14.2.5
The Device Type
14.2.6
Fixture switch settings
14.2.7
Mirror
14.2.8
The DMX/Preset Layout
14.2.9
Text Field
14.2.10
The Preset Focus (Palette) table
14.2.11
Macros
14.2.12
Range tables
14.2.13
Example Personality File for the High End Cyberlight
212
215
215
215
215
215
216
216
216
217
218
219
220
220
221
222
222
15. GLOSSARY OF TERMS
227
16. INDEX
233
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
1. Setting up the console - Page 109
C H A P T E R
1.
O N E
Setting up the console
This chapter contains: Connecting mains power; connecting DMX lines;
connecting MIDI devices; connecting audio; the disk drive; other back
panel connections and controls; desk modes.
1.1
Connecting up
1.1.1
Connecting mains power
Important! Before connecting the mains power to the Pearl you must
check if the Pearl has a voltage selector switch next to the mains
socket; if it does, make sure it is set to match your mains supply. It
can be set to 120V or 220V.
If the Pearl does not have a voltage selector switch you can safely
connect it to any voltage from 80 to 260V.
If you connect mains power with the switch set incorrectly, you will
probably blow up the power supply unit. If this happens you will need
to shamefacedly return the console to Avolites for repair.
1.1.2
Connecting DMX lines
The Pearl can output DMX down 4 separate lines. When you patch a
dimmer or fixture you can tell the Pearl which DMX line it is on. The
lines are identified by the letters A,B,C,D. Normally A comes out of
output 1, B comes from 2, C from 3, and D from 4, but just to add to
the fun you can swap this round if you want (see Patching, section 2).
The 4 DMX outputs come out of the 5 pin XLR sockets on the back of
the console. The Pearl 2004 onwards have four separate sockets. The
Pearl 2000 had only two sockets with two DMX lines on each, so you
need splitter cables to access all four lines on the Pearl 2000. They are
wired like this:
DMX line
1 (normally A)
2 (normally B)
3 (normally C)
4 (normally D)
Pearl 2004
Socket
Pin numbers
1&3
2=Data 3=Data +
2&4
2=Data 3=Data +
3
2=Data 3=Data +
4
2=Data 3=Data +
Pearl 2000
Socket
Pin numbers
1&3
2=Data 3=Data +
2&4
2=Data 3=Data +
1&3
4=Data 5=Data +
2&4
4=Data 5=Data +
The sockets marked “1 & 3” and “2 & 4” on the newer Pearls have pins
4 and 5 connected to the other DMX lines as with the Pearl 2000,
making the newer consoles pin-compatible with the Pearl 2000 if
replacing one console with the other.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 110 - 1. Setting up the console
1.1.3
Connecting MIDI devices
The Pearl has the usual MIDI IN and OUT connections. It can read MIDI
information and use it to trigger a show, and it can output MIDI
information in response to user actions on the controls. This means you
can record a show straight into a MIDI sequencer by operating the
show yourself using the buttons and sliders. The MIDI operation of the
console is described in section 13 on page 208.
1.1.4
Connecting audio
The Pearl provides a stereo audio input for sound to light functions. The
stereo channels are combined internally to give a mono signal.
The Pearl has a stereo audio input socket with a gain control next to it.
The Pearl 2000 has two mono jacks and the gain control is on the front
panel with the LCD contrast/brightness controls.
There is an internal link on the PCB to set the overall sensitivity of the
audio inputs to mic or line level. By default the audio input is set to
maximum sensitivity. See page 207 for details.
1.1.5
Other back panel connections and controls
Qwerty: for connecting a standard PC keyboard. This is used for
entering legends to name memories, chases and palettes. If using a
keyboard you should connect it before you turn the power on.
VDU: for connecting a VGA display. Any standard VGA display will be
OK, the console uses a 640x480 text mode. You do not have to connect
the VDU screen as most information is shown on the console’s on-board
display, but some extra displays are available on the VDU screen which
are useful when programming or operating a complex show.
Serial: is for the Stage Remote or the graphics tablet.
DMX In: allows you to capture DMX from an external system into
memories on the Pearl using the Include function.
USB: for future use in the software.
Visualiser: : (if fitted) allows direct connection to a PC running
Visualiser; alternatively a MIDI adaptor cable can be used to connect
Visualiser to the MIDI ports. Set the MIDI setting to “Visualiser” (see
page 195) to enable communication with Visualiser. The console will
run more slowly when Visualiser is enabled
Reset button: allows you to restart the Pearl if something funny
happens to it. The Pearl will come back to the same place it was in
when you pressed Reset, but all playbacks will be turned off. The
memory is not affected.
LCD contrast and brightness controls are on the front of the console
next to the key switch. If you can’t see anything on the display, first set
the contrast control to a central position, then adjust it for best display.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
1. Setting up the console - Page 111
The brightness control sets the intensity of the display’s backlight.
1.1.6
The desk lamp
The desk lamp plugs into the socket in the top left hand corner of the
Pearl and can be switched to Off, Dim or Full using the switch next to it.
The desk lamp uses a 12V, 5W halogen lamp.
1.2
Operating
1.2.1
Operating modes
The Pearl has a key-operated switch on the right hand side of the panel
which allows you to select the operating mode of the console.
When running a show, you normally select Run mode. You can run
playbacks and (in Takeover run mode) manually control fixtures (see
page 183). You cannot change any programming. This is the best mode
if others are operating the console and you want to make sure they
can’t mess up your programming. Just take the key with you!!
When programming, you need to be in Program mode, which you
access by turning the key to Program. This manual assumes you are in
program mode.
System mode allows you to clear parts or all of the console using
softkey F [Wipe], to access AVO mode, various diagnostics and to load
a new operating system. There are more details about AVO mode in
Section 13 on page 204.
1.2.2
Saving to and loading from disk
The Pearl 2008/Tiger has a USB port for connection of a USB pen drive
to load and save shows. It is also fitted with an internal USB disk for
saving shows and storing personality files.
All versions of the Pearl have a 1.44MB floppy disk drive which is used
to load and save shows, personality files and system software. The
standard PC disk format is used, so you can transfer data to and from
your PC. You can use the smaller 720KB disks, but large shows may not
fit.
You should get into the habit of backing up your show to disk regularly
to guard against that moment when something goes wrong or you
make an unintentional change.
1>
Press the Disk button in the bottom right hand corner of the Pearl
2>
Insert a blank formatted 1.44M disk into the disk drive.
3>
Press B [Save show to disk]. Enter a name on the QWERTY
keyboard (or press Enter on the console to use the default name).
The Pearl will save the show.
4>
To reload the show, use softkey A [Load show from disk].
Other disk drive functions are available when you have pressed the
Disk button. The disk drive functions are described in section 13 on
page 197.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 112 - 1. Setting up the console
1.2.3
The front panel controls
Mode select keyswitch
Preset handles
Playback page
select roller
Master faders
Main display
Playback faders &
flash buttons
Control
wheels
Menu
softkeys
Fixture page
buttons
Command
buttons
Numeric
keypad and
controls
•
The Preset Faders control individual dimmer channels and fixture
intensities. The 2 buttons below the faders select and flash
fixtures. Each fader and buttons is called a “Handle”.
•
The Mode select keyswitch sets the operating mode of the
console; Program for programming a show, Run for running the
show and System for configuring the console.
•
The Page select roller lets you select different pages of
playbacks, and you can write the playback names on the roller so
you know what’s in them.
•
The Master faders control the overall output of the various parts
of the console. You will normally have these set at Full.
•
The Playback faders and flash buttons are used to play back
memories you have programmed, when you are running a show.
•
The Main display is the nerve centre of the console and shows
you what is going on. The display can show various screens of
information.
•
The Control wheels are used to set control values on the
fixtures, and to set chase speeds and fades.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Attribute
select buttons
1. Setting up the console - Page 113
1.2.4
•
The Menu softkeys (labelled A – G) are used to select control
options. The display next to the buttons shows what each one will
do. The options for each key change depending on what the
console is doing. Softkey commands are shown in the manual with
square brackets like this: A [Chase Parameters]
•
The Numeric keypad and other control buttons are used to enter
values and change controls on the console.
•
The Fixture Page buttons are below the keypad, which select 4
pages for the Preset Faders.
•
The blue Command buttons are used to carry out functions such
as storing memories, copying, saving to disk, etc. These buttons
have lights on to indicate when they are active.
•
The Attribute select buttons are used to select which attributes
of a fixture (e.g. colour, gobo, pan, focus) are going to be
controlled using the Control wheels. The buttons have lights on to
show you which attributes are active. The bottom (red) button
allows you to reduce the intensity of a fixture if it loses position
during a show.
View screens
The Pearl can display a wide range of different information screens on
its inbuilt LCD and on the external VDU screen.
LCD views
•
•
•
Channel Output: Press
View then Softkey A.
Shows the output of
the selected attribute
for each handle. You
can change the
attribute by pressing a
different attribute
button (Dimmer,
tilt/pan etc). The
display only shows the
first 30 handles, press
the current Pages Of
Fixtures button to
show 31-60.
Fixture attributes:
Press View then
Softkey B. Shows
which attributes of the
currently selected
fixture are allocated to
wheel A and wheel B.
The view will be blank
if no fixtures are
selected.
Message area
Softkey functions
Main
display
area
View
screen
number
Chase
info
Wheel functions
and values
Free memory
DMX Patch: Press View then Softkey C. Shows which fixture each
DMX output channel is patched to, the attribute of that fixture, and
the actual DMX value being output on that channel. Use the arrow
keys to show different pages of the patch.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 114 - 1. Setting up the console
•
Fixture Patch: Press View then Softkey D. The top part of the
display shows a list of handles with the fixtures patched to them.
An arrow shows the active fixture; some fixture types will display
further information (such as how to set the fixture’s dip switches)
in the bottom part of the display.
•
Chase times: Press View then Connect. If a chase is running the
display will show information about the steps in the current chase.
If no chase is running the display will show “No chase”.
•
Playback status: Press View then 7 then Enter. The display shows
which playbacks are programmed (with a star), which are active
and whether they are running a memory or a chase.
VDU screen views
Press Softkey G to switch the menu to the VDU view menu. Press
Softkey G again to switch back to the LCD view menu.
•
Stage Intensities: Press View then Softkey A. Shows the intensity
Roller page and
segment
Chase number and
step numbers
Playback legends
Chase progress
bargraph
Main display area
Graphics tablet
status
Wheel functions and
values
of each handle/fader (the numbers shown are handle numbers not
DMX channel numbers)
•
Stage fixtures: Press View then softkey B. Shows the output of
each attribute for the different fixture types patched. Use the arrow
keys to select which fixture type you are looking at (deselect all
fixtures or the arrow keys will just change the fixture selection). At
the bottom of the main display window, the display shows which
fixture type is selected (in blue).
•
Fixtures and attributes: Press View then softkey C. Displays the
selected attribute for each fixture. Press a different Attribute button
to show other attributes.
•
View programmer: Press View then softkey D. The display shows
fixtures which are in the programmer (on the left) and the
attributes which are in the programmer (on the right). The desk
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
1. Setting up the console - Page 115
controls do not operate while you are viewing the programmer, you
need to press Exit to return to normal.
1.2.5
•
View Shapes: Press View then softkey E. The display shows
information about active shapes.
•
View Fixture Notes: Press View then softkey F, then select a
patched fixture type from one of the softkeys. Fixture notes from
the personality file (if it contains any) will be displayed on the VDU.
Press Exit to get back to normal.
Pearl Tiger
The Pearl Tiger is very similar to its larger brother but has been cut
down in a few areas. It has only one bank of preset handles and has
fewer playback faders.
Mode select keyswitch
Preset handles
Playback page
select roller
Master faders
Main display
Playback faders &
flash buttons
Control
wheels
Menu
softkeys
Fixture page
buttons
All functions are the same as the Pearl 2008 as shown
on the previous page. The Pearl Tiger has an optional
“wing” (pictured right) which may be plugged in to
increase the number of playback faders to 15.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Command
Numeric buttons
Attribute
keypad and
select buttons
controls
Page 116 - 1. Setting up the console
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
2. Patching - Page 117
C H A P T E R
2.
T W O
Patching
This chapter contains: Fixture handles; patching dimmers; patching
moving light fixtures; checking the patching; changing the DMX
address; moving a fixture to a different handle; deleting a patched
fixture; patching options.
Patching is the process where you tell the Pearl
•
What type of lighting units you have connected to it
•
What DMX addresses they are operating at
•
Which DMX output line each unit is connected to (there are 4)
•
Which “handles” (control sliders) you want to use to access them
You can either patch the DMX channels on your console to match your
lighting rig, or set up the console first and then set the lighting rig to
match.
The Pearl must be in Program mode before you can patch.
2.1
Create
2.1.1
Fixture handles
Handles (Preset faders)
The Pearl can control up to 240 intelligent
fixtures or dimmer channels. To do this it has
4 pages of 60 control “handles”. The handles
are located in 2 rows of 30 along the top of
the console. Each handle consists of:
•
a slider, used to set the intensity of the
fixture or dimmer patched to the handle,
•
a “Swop” button which is used in program
mode to select the fixture
•
a “flash” button which is used to select
Palettes and to flash the channel in Run mode.
The top bank of 30 sliders does not have buttons and is accessed using
the Swop button of the slider below while the AVO button is held down
acting as a “shift” key.
Tiger: The Pearl Tiger only has the bottom
row of handles (1-30). However the
top handles (31-60) may still be
accessed using the 1-30 Swop buttons
while holding the AVO button..
The fixture page buttons are located just to
the right of the wheels. Fixtures 1-30 are on
page 0--, Fixtures 101-130 on page 1--, 201230 on page 2—and 301-330 on page 3--.
You can change the fixture page at any time.
The Pearl also allows you to allocate fixtures
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Pages of fixtures buttons
Page 118 - 2. Patching
and dimmers to Groups, which can be useful if you usually select the
same set of fixtures together. Groups are described in the next chapter.
2.1.2
Patching dimmers
Each dimmer channel is allocated to one handle. If you want to link
dimmers together, you can allocate several to the same handle.
2.1.3
1>
Press Patch, then A [Dimmer]
2>
On the top line of the display, the Pearl shows the DMX address it
is going to patch at. You can change this by typing a new address
on the numeric keypad. You can also use softkey E [Select a DMX
line] to patch onto one of the other 3 DMX output lines.
3>
To patch a single dimmer, press a handle Swop button. To patch a
range of dimmers, hold down the Swop button for the first
dimmer in the range, then press the last Swop button in the
range. The range of dimmers will be patched to sequential DMX
addresses.
4>
To patch another dimmer to the same handle, enter the new DMX
channel and press the Swop button again
5>
Repeat from step 2 for other dimmers.
•
The VDU screen will
show the channels
which have been
patched.
•
You can patch
multiple dimmers
onto the same
handle by typing
the DMX address of
the next dimmer to
be patched and
pressing the Swop
button again.
•
You can patch
Grid showing usage
Devices patched
dimmers to the top
of DMX channels
faders (31-60) by
holding down the AVO button before pressing the Swop button.
This allows you to patch up to 60 dimmers or fixtures on one page.
It is often convenient to use the top faders for dimmers and the
bottom faders for fixtures allowing you to keep all your fixtures and
dimmers on one fixture page.
•
When in Dimmer Patch mode you can set options for dimmer
channels which you are going to patch. You can set the “Full on”
level to less than 100% using option A, and select a different
dimmer response curve using option B. To use the “User curve”
setting you need to load in a user curve, see page 197. These
settings affect all dimmer channels you patch afterwards, until you
change the settings again. Channels you have already patched are
not affected.
Patching moving light fixtures
Moving light fixtures are more complicated to patch than dimmers
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
2. Patching - Page 119
because they have more attributes to control, such as pan, tilt, colour
etc., where a dimmer channel just has intensity. When you patch a
fixture, you will see on the display that it occupies a block of DMX
channels rather than just one.
The Pearl uses a “personality” system to control fixtures. There is a
personality file in the Pearl for most types of fixture, which tells it what
attributes are available and how to control them. If the Pearl does not
have the personality for your fixture, you can download a wide range of
personalities from the Avolites website onto disk and load them that
way. If you use fixtures often you can add them to the internal store.
In the unlikely event that no personality exists for the fixture you are
using, Avolites will create one for you. You can also create the file
yourself if you have some programming abilities. See chapter 12 on
page 215 for details of how to find personalities.
Note:
The Pearl holds all the personalities in an internal “cache” file. If
the console memory gets totally wiped you might need to
reload the file, how to do it is described on page 201.
1>
Press Patch, then B [Choose a Fixture], then select the
“AVOCACH” USB drive (unless you’re loading a personality from
an external disk).
2>
A list of fixture manufacturers is shown. Use F [More] and G
[Back] to go up and down the list and find the correct
manufacturer, then press the softkey next to the name to select
it.
3>
A list of fixtures from that manufacturer is shown. Use F [More]
and G [Back] to go up and down the list and find the correct
fixture, then press the softkey next to the fixture to select it.
4>
The Pearl loads the fixture information. The display shows details
of the fixture.
5>
The Pearl will ask “Use preset palettes?”. Press A [Yes]. This loads
a standard set of positions, colours and gobos into the Palette
pages which can be useful when programming. If you say No now,
you can’t load them later.
6>
On the display, the Pearl shows the DMX address it is going to
patch at. You can change this using the numeric keypad. You can
also press E [Select a DMX line] to patch onto one of the other 3
DMX output lines.
7>
Press an unused handle Swop button to patch the fixture. The
VDU screen will show the block of channels occupied by the
fixture. If you want to use a different fixture page, select the new
page first.
8>
Repeat from Step 7 to patch more of this type of fixture.
9>
Press A [Select another fixture] and repeat from Step 3 to patch a
different type of fixture.
•
You can patch a range of fixtures by holding down the first and
last Swop buttons of the range, the same as for dimmers.
•
Unlike dimmers, you cannot patch more than one fixture onto a
handle. If the handle is already used, the patch will fail. Use a
different handle or delete the fixture already on the handle if you
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 120 - 2. Patching
don’t want it any more.
2.1.4
•
Some fixtures can only be patched at certain DMX addresses. This
is usually described in the fixture instruction manual. If this
information is included in the fixture personality, the Pearl will not
allow you to patch the fixture at an illegal address, and will offer
the next valid address instead.
•
If you are patching a fixture which uses a separate dimmer
channel such as a VL5™, you can patch the dimmer channel onto
the same handle as the moving light part of the fixture, so you
can control it all together. This is called a Pending dimmer.
•
Each manufacturer and fixture type has a shortcut number (shown
on the list), you can type this in on the keypad when patching to
jump straight to that manufacturer or fixture.
Checking the patching
Having set the Pearl, you need to ensure that your lighting rig is set up
to match the Pearl by going round your rig to set the DMX addresses.
You can display the DMX settings on the Pearl like this.
1>
Press the View button next to the numeric keys
2>
Press D [Fixture Patch]
3>
The display shows a list of the
handles to which you have
patched fixtures or dimmers,
with the DMX line and address
(e.g. A24 is address 24 on DMX
line A).
4>
The top handle on the list has an
arrow next to it. The lower part
of the display shows more
information for this handle,
including dip switch settings if
the fixture personality includes
this information.
5>
Use the up-down cursor arrows
to change the selected fixture.
The left-right cursor arrows will
show you another page of
handles.
6>
Repeat from Step 4 to view other
fixtures.
•
Press View, then C [DMX patch] to display a list of all DMX
channels, what they are allocated to and the current output. The
cursor arrows scroll through the list.
•
Press View then a handle Swop button to display the settings for
the fixture patched to that handle.
•
You do not need to be in patch mode to view this information, you
can do it at any time.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
2. Patching - Page 121
2.2
Edit
2.2.1
Changing the DMX address of a fixture
You can re-patch a fixture to a different DMX address or a different
DMX output line. All programming is kept.
2.2.2
1>
Press Patch (if you’re not already in Patch mode).
2>
Press E [Repatch Fixtures].
3>
Use the numeric keypad to enter the new DMX address of the
fixture. If you want to change the DMX output line, press E
[Select a DMX line] and choose a new output line by pressing A B
C or D.
4>
Press the handle swop button for the fixture to patch that fixture
at the new address.
5>
Press Enter to confirm the change.
6>
Repeat from step 3 if you want to change other fixtures.
•
If the new DMX address was already used by another handle, the
fixture or dimmer on that handle will be “parked”. All
programming for the handle is preserved, but you need to patch it
to a new DMX address using the above procedure before you can
use it again. If you view the fixture patch as described above, the
display will show “park”.
Moving a fixture to a different handle
You can move a dimmer or fixture from one handle to another simply
by entering the DMX channel to match the address of the fixture, then
patching it again onto another handle. However, all programming is lost
for that dimmer channel or fixture.
2.3
Delete
2.3.1
Deleting a patched fixture
You can delete a fixture or dimmer from a handle if you patched it
accidentally or if you change your rig and want to use the handle for
something else.
1>
Press Patch (if you’re not already in Patch mode).
2>
Press the blue Delete button (the light will flash).
3>
Press the Swop button of the handle you want to delete.
4>
Press Enter to confirm.
•
You can delete individual DMX channels from a handle by typing
the channel number instead of pressing a Swop button. This is
useful for deleting dimmer channels from handles which have
multiple channels patched to them. Be careful not to delete
individual channels out of fixtures using this function.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 122 - 2. Patching
2.4
Advanced options
2.4.1
Patch Utilities
The Pearl allows several options to be set for each fixture or dimmer
when it is being patched. The Patch Options menu is accessed by
pressing F [Patch Utilities] while you are in patch mode. Set the options
before you start programming, because memories will play back
differently when the options are on.
The options are:
A: Invert - Allows you to invert an attribute of a fixture, so when you
set zero the output will be full. You cannot invert some attributes.
1>
Select the fixtures you want to invert and turn them on so you
can see their output state
2>
Select the attribute you want to invert by pressing the Attribute
Select button (some can’t be changed)
3>
Press Softkey E or F to invert the attributes shown (the VDU
screen shows the inversion settings)
4>
Repeat from 2 if you want to invert more attributes, or 1 if you
want to change other fixtures.
5>
Press Exit to leave Invert mode as soon as you’ve finished, it is
easy to accidentally invert fixtures if you leave this mode active
B: Set/Reset Instant mode - When the Pearl fades LTP (movement)
channels between two memories, the LTP values normally change
smoothly. You can set Instant mode to make the channel snap instantly
to the new value.
1>
Select the fixtures you want to change
2>
Select the attribute you want to change (some can’t be changed)
3>
Press Softkey E or F once to change the attributes shown (the
VDU screen shows the settings)
4>
Repeat from 2 if you want to change more attributes, or 1 if you
want to change other fixtures.
5>
Press Exit to leave Instant mode as soon as you’ve finished, it is
easy to accidentally change fixtures if you leave this mode active
C: Swap pan and tilt - If you have some fixtures mounted sideways,
it can be useful to swap the pan and tilt channels over.
1>
Press softkey C
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
2. Patching - Page 123
2>
Press the Swop buttons of the fixtures you want to change
3>
Repeat from 2 to change other fixtures.
D: Set DMX lines - The Pearl has 4 DMX output lines, this option lets
you set which connectors they come out of. You can output the same
DMX line from more than one connector if you want to.
The console shows the current settings of the DMX outputs on the VDU
screen. You need the VDU screen connected to set this option, as the
settings are not shown on the on-board display. Use the cursor arrows
to select the output you want to change. Press Softkeys A-D to select
the DMX line you want to come out of this output.
You can also use this option to set the highest DMX channel to
transmit. This will speed up the DMX refresh rate if you are not using all
512 channels. (This option can also be set from the User settings
menu).
E: Find fixture - This option lets you find “lost” fixtures (if you have
set the DMX address and forgotten what it was, or a fixture has
changed its address on its own). You need the VDU screen connected to
use this option as the settings are not shown on the on-board display.
1>
Using the cursor arrows, select the type of fixture & press enter
2>
Spin wheel A until the fixture responds with its “Locate Fixture”
state (open white beam, central position). Use the cursor up and
down arrows to change one channel at a time.
3>
You can change the DMX output line using the A B C D softkeys or
directly enter a channel by pressing softkey G
4>
Read the DMX address from the VDU screen.
5>
Press Exit when you have finished.
F: Set Default DMX lines - This option sets the DMX line mappings
back to the factory defaults, as shown in Chapter 1. The LCD display
also shows how the DMX lines will be set. Press Softkey A to confirm
the setting.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 124 - 2. Patching
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
3. Controlling dimmers and fixtures - Page 125
C H A P T E R
3.
T H R E E
Controlling dimmers and fixtures
This chapter contains: Selecting fixtures and dimmers for control;
changing attributes of the selected fixtures; using groups; selecting
fixtures one at a time; the align and flip buttons; killing off a fixture;
entering levels as numbers; the ML menu and tracking; viewing the
output.
When you are programming a show, and sometimes when you are
running a show, you need to manually control the fixtures and dimmers
to set the intensity, position, colour, etc. To do this you first select the
fixtures you want to change using the Swop buttons, then you set the
attributes of those fixtures using the Wheels and Attribute buttons.
3.1
Create
3.1.1
Selecting fixtures and dimmers for control
To select the fixtures or dimmer channels that you want to control, you
use the handle Swop buttons. You can select fixtures or dimmers
individually, or several at once.
You can control dimmer channels and fixture intensity directly from the
fader control of the handle, or select the channels as described below
and use the Dimmer attribute.
1>
Press the handle Swop buttons for the fixtures you want. The LED
in the Swop button comes on for selected fixtures (they are also
shown in dark blue on the VDU screen)
2>
To select a range of fixtures, hold down the Swop button for the
first fixture then press the Swop button for the last fixture.
Here are some other things to know:
•
Press the red Locate button, or ML Menu then A [Locate Fixture]
to position the selected fixtures in open white at a central position
(dimmer channels go to 100%). These values are not loaded into
the programmer - they won’t be saved in a memory unless you
modify the fixture.
•
If you want to light up a fixture without moving its position, use
ML Menu then B [Locate Fixture no Pan & Tilt]”.
•
You can deselect a fixture by pressing the fixture select button
again.
•
Once you have changed any attribute, pressing a handle Swop
button will deselect all fixtures and start the selection process
again.
•
You can select fixtures on another page by pressing one of the
“Pages of Fixtures” buttons.
•
If you have fixtures patched to the top faders you can select them
by holding down the AVO button and pressing the Swop button of
the fader below. This also works on the Pearl Tiger even though
the top faders are not fitted.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 126 - 3. Controlling dimmers and fixtures
3.1.2
Changing attributes of the selected fixtures
“Attributes” are the functions of the fixture, like pan, tilt, colour,
dimmer, etc. You select which attributes you want to modify using the
buttons on the right edge of the console
Attribute select buttons
and set values using the wheels at the
bottom of the Pearl. The attributes
available depend on the fixture type.
Dimmer channels only have a dimmer
attribute. The Pearl can control up to 40
attributes per fixture.
Each attribute button controls two
attributes, one on the left wheel and
one on the right wheel.
1>
Press the button for the attribute
to be changed
2>
Turn the wheels to set the
Control wheels
attribute. The display above the
wheels shows which attributes are being controlled.
3>
Repeat from 1 to change other attributes of the selected fixtures.
Some other things to know about attributes:
•
The Attribute buttons let you select the first 20 attributes. Another
20 attributes are available by pressing the “Attribute Banks 11-20”
button, to cater for the weird and wonderful DMX fixtures of the
future. The light on the button stays on when you are using the
top 20 attributes.
•
If the display above the wheels does not show the attribute when
you press the button, that attribute is not available on the
selected fixtures.
•
You can directly control the intensity of the fixture/dimmer using
the fader of the handle.
•
You can view the available attributes by pressing the View button
then B [Fixture Attributes]. The display shows a list of available
attributes for the fixture you’ve selected.
•
The wheels operate in an “acceleration” mode. If you spin the
wheel fast, the fixture changes in larger steps. If you move the
wheel slowly, the fixture moves in its smallest increment. (This
replaces the 16-bit mode found on older Pearl software). You can
change the acceleration response of the wheels by holding down
AVO and pressing 2 (see page 197 for details). You may want a
different response for very fine adjustments, or to suit your wheel
spinning style.
•
Holding down AVO while turning a wheel puts the wheel into
“hyper-drive” mode where one complete revolution takes the
attribute from 0 to 100%.
•
The display above the wheels either shows the output value
(percentage and raw DMX value), or it can show Intelligent
Attribute Display (for a colour wheel, the display would show
“Open”, “Red”, “Orange” and so on as you turn the wheel). Hold
down AVO and press 1 to enable or disable Intelligent Attribute
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
3. Controlling dimmers and fixtures - Page 127
display. The personality fixture must have Range Tables for this to
work.
3.1.3
Selecting attributes from the softkeys
You can directly set attributes from the softkeys.
3.1.4
1>
Press E [Select an attribute or table] from the main menu
2>
Select an attribute type to set. If the attribute is highlighted, a list
of possible settings will appear when you press it (for example, a
list of possible colours)
3>
Select the value you want by
pressing a softkey.
4>
Repeat from 1 to change other
attributes of the selected
fixtures.
•
The Wheel A and B windows
display the table of available
values. You can also use the
wheels to scroll through the
settings.
•
If the attribute type is not
highlighted, there are no
settings available. Pressing the
softkey for that attribute will
change the selected attribute
button but not do anything else.
•
Selecting a value from a list will
select attribute banks 11-20.
You’ll need to press the Attribute Banks 11-20 button to get back
to the normal attributes.
Using groups
You can create groups of fixtures or dimmer channels, to make
selecting them faster. You can, for example, make a group for each
type of fixture, or group by left / right stage, etc.
1>
Select the fixtures/dimmers you want in the group (the order in
which you select them will also be stored in the group)
2>
Press ML Menu, then E [Record Group]
3>
Type the group number you want to store it as, and press Enter
4>
Repeat from 1 to store other groups
Other useful things to know about groups:
3.1.5
•
To select all the fixtures/dimmers in a group, type the group
number on the numeric keypad, then press A [Recall Group]. All
other fixtures and dimmers are deselected.
•
The order in which you select the fixtures takes effect when you
use the last fixture – next fixture functions described in the next
section, and when you use Shapes and Fan mode.
Stepping through selected fixtures one at a time
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 128 - 3. Controlling dimmers and fixtures
If you have selected a range of fixtures, or a group, the Pearl has
functions to step through the selected fixtures one at a time. This can
make it easier to program a range of fixtures because you don’t have to
select each one manually.
This mode uses the “Sequence Control” buttons which are normally
used for controlling chases.
3.1.6
1>
Put the Pearl into Fixture Select mode by holding down the AVO
button and pressing Softkey B until
the option shows [Fixture Control
Enabled]
2>
Select a range of fixtures or a
group
3>
(Forward)
The  (Reverse) and
buttons will select the fixtures in
the range one at a time
4>
The  (Bounce) button will
highlight the output of the selected
fixture so you can see it on stage
(the button LED is lit when in
Highlight mode)
Sequence control buttons
5>
The Review button reselects the whole range of fixtures.
•
The Sequence Control buttons stay in this mode until you change
them back by holding AVO and pressing Softkey B again. This
means you cannot use them for controlling chase direction.
•
You can also use the left and right arrow keys to step through
selected fixtures.
•
The selected fixture from the range will light up, and the other
fixtures will go out (if the “Highlight Enabled” option in the ML
menu is turned on).
The Align and Flip functions
The Align function allows you to copy an attribute from one fixture to
others. This can be useful if you want to set a row of moving lights to
have the same tilt position, or if you want to copy a colour from one
fixture onto other fixtures.
1>
Press an attribute button to select the attribute you want to align.
2>
Select the fixture to use as the reference
3>
Select the other fixtures you want to align to the first one
4>
Press ML Menu, then D [Align <attribute name>].
5>
The attributes will be copied to all the selected fixtures.
•
You can align all attributes of the fixtures using Softkey C [Align
Fixtures] (it doesn’t matter which attribute is selected).
•
If you use a group to select the fixtures, the one you selected first
when you recorded the group will be the reference fixture.
•
If Tracking mode is on (see page 131), aligning the Pan/Tilt
attribute will cause all the fixtures to point at the same place on
the stage rather than copying the actual Pan/Tilt values.
The Flip function is used with moving head fixtures. This type of fixture
has two possible pan and tilt positions for each point on stage, and the
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
3. Controlling dimmers and fixtures - Page 129
Flip button alternates between them. This allows you more freedom to
make movements without hitting the pan stop.
3.1.7
1>
Select the fixtures to flip.
2>
Press ML Menu twice (option A should be Flip)
3>
Press A [Flip].
•
The other functions on the ML menu are described at the end of
the chapter.
“Killing off” a fixture or dimmer
Sometimes during a show you might want to “kill” a fixture or dimmer
from the stage output. This may happen if a camera is having problems
with a light shining straight into it, if a lamp blows and you want to
keep the rig symmetrical or if a fixture loses position.
The “Locate/Reduce intensity” button allows you to temporarily dim or
turn off any fixture or dimmer. Programming is not affected and you
can later restore it to normal operation. You can do this in program
mode or run mode. You have to hold down the AVO button to access
the function to stop it being accidentally pressed.
3.1.8
1>
Hold down the AVO button and press “Locate/Reduce Intensity”
(in the lower right corner).
2>
Put the fader for the fixture/dimmer channel to be reduced up to
full (if it was already full, take it to zero then up to full).
3>
Reduce the fader to the intensity level you want.
4>
Repeat from 2 to reduce other fixtures.
5>
Press Reduce Intensity to finish.
•
To restore the fixture, do the above but leave the fader at full. The
fixture will stay “reduced” until you restore it.
•
Make sure you turn off Reduce Intensity when you have finished,
otherwise you will end up reducing intensities when you don’t
want to, and wondering why none of your fixtures are coming on.
•
To cancel all reductions, put all faders to zero, then press AVO and
the Reduce Intensity button and put all faders to full, then press
the button again to end.
•
If the Swop buttons are in “mimic” mode (see page 185), they will
show the programmed output of the channel, not the reduced
output.
•
To see what reductions are set, select the “Stage Intensities” view
or the “Stage Fixtures” view from the VDU Views menu.
Entering intensity levels as numbers
You can set levels using the numeric keypad as you would on a
theatrical lighting desk. If you are used to doing this, it can be faster
when plotting dimmer levels for a scene than using the select buttons
and the wheels.
1>
Press the Channel button
2>
Type the dimmer or fixture handle number (not the DMX channel)
on the keypad.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 130 - 3. Controlling dimmers and fixtures
3>
Press G [At %].
4>
Press 0 - 9 for the intensity (0=0%, 1=10%, 2=20%, 3.5=35%),
or Softkey G again for 100%
5>
Press the decimal point key and another digit for more accurate
control
6>
Press Channel again to get back to normal (the Exit button does
not operate in this mode)
Other things you can do by numeric entry:
3.1.9
•
The softkey options are B: Blackout, D or G: set to 100%, E:up by
5%, F:down by 5%.
•
You can select multiple dimmer handles (which you can then
control using the wheels) using softkey F [Through]. Enter the first
dimmer number, press [Through], then the last dimmer. For
example 1 Through 10 would select dimmers 1 to 10.
•
You can also set multiple dimmers to the same level using softkey
F [Through]. Enter first dimmer number, [through], last dimmer,
[At %], level. For example, 1 [Through] 1 0 [At%] 5 would set
dimmers 1 to 10 to 50%.
•
Softkey B [Select new fixture type] lets you tell the desk the type
of fixture you are working with. It uses this when you select
fixtures. Normally it is set to “desk channel” and will select fixtures
starting from handle 1. If you set it to dimmer, it will only select
dimmers, starting at the first dimmer patched, so selecting 1
“through” 10 would select the first 10 dimmers, wherever they are
patched. You can set the option to any fixture type you have
patched on the console.
•
If you have more than one dimmer/fixture selected, Softkey C
[Odd or Even], allows you to select the odd and even numbered
channels. Softkey B selects Even channels and C selects Odd
channels. Softkey A selects all channels again after you have used
this option.
•
Softkey E [Select Group] allows you to recall a group by entering
the group number.
Controlling fixtures by entering values
You can also directly enter values for fixture attributes. This can be
useful for programming palette values from a fixture data sheet.
1>
Select the fixtures to be set by pressing the Swop buttons
2>
Select the attribute to be set using the Attribute buttons
3>
Type the value to set.
4>
Press Softkey E or F to set the A/B wheel attribute (displayed next
to the softkey).
5>
Press G [Set input to 0-255 / %] to change the entry mode
between 0-100 and 0-255.
•
You can change the attributes to be set by pressing another
Attribute button, but then you will need to enter the value again.
•
You can also recall groups of fixtures or dimmers (type group
number, then press A [Recall Group]).
•
You can recall palette entries (type palette entry number, then
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
3. Controlling dimmers and fixtures - Page 131
press B [Recall Focus])
3.1.10 Fan mode
Fan mode automatically spreads out the values on a selected range of
fixtures. If used on pan and tilt, the result is spreading out “rays” of
light beams. The first and last fixtures of the range are affected most,
and the central fixtures are affected least. The amount of fan can be set
using the wheels.
As with shapes, the order in which you select the fixtures sets how the
fan effect works. The fixtures you select first and last will be the ones
which change most. If you use a group to select the fixtures, the order
is that in which the fixtures in the group were selected when it was
created.
The fan effect, while normally used on pan or tilt attributes, can be
applied to any attribute.
1>
Select the fixtures you want to fan
2>
Select the attribute to fan (pan/tilt, colour etc)
3>
Press Fan
4>
Set the amount of fan using the wheels
5>
The display shows which attribute is being controlled by each
wheel
6>
Turn off Fan by pressing the Fan button again when you have
finished
Fan mode needs to be used on at least 4 fixtures to give good effects.
If you have an odd number of fixtures, the central fixture will not move
in fan mode.
Press the Fan button again to leave Fan mode. Any effects you have set
will remain in the programmer.
•
It’s fairly easy to accidentally leave Fan mode turned on and be
very confused about why the wheels aren’t working properly, so
turn it off as soon as you have completed the effect.
3.2
Advanced options
3.2.1
The ML menu and Tracking
The “ML menu” (Moving Light menu) button allows access to some
handy features for moving lights.
If you press the ML Menu button again you will get a second set of
options
Option A “Locate Fixture” positions selected fixtures at central position,
with light coming out of them. The settings are not placed in the
programmer, so you need to change the values if you want to save
them. The “locate fixture” settings for each type of fixture are defined
in the personality file. This function is the same as pressing the red
Locate button.
Option B “Locate Fixture no pan/tilt” turns on the selected fixtures but
does not move them to a central position. This is useful if you don’t
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 132 - 3. Controlling dimmers and fixtures
want to disturb the positioning of fixtures but need to light them up.
Option C and D “Align Fixtures” and “Align <attributes>” are
described in section 3.1.6 on page 128.
Option E “Record group” is used to group fixtures for easy selection as
described in section 3.1.4 on page 127.
Option F allows you to turn the Pearl’s 3D stage tracking mode off or
on. You can also do this from the graphics tablet (see page 180). When
tracking mode is on, the pan and tilt controls set the position on the
stage rather than absolute DMX values. You need to Define the Stage
(see next page) before you can use Tracking.
Option G is used to run “macros” which are used to strike lamps or
reset fixtures, etc. These features often require a sequence of levels to
be sent on different control channels, which the Pearl can do
automatically if the macro is defined in the personality file for the
fixture.
The display will show a list of available macros for the fixtures which
are currently selected. If no macros are available for those fixtures, the
option will not do anything. The Personality File section on page 215
contains details.
On the second page of the ML menu… (press ML Menu again)
Option A “Flip” is described in section 3.1.6 on page 128.
Option B “Calculator” displays a screen on the VDU screen allowing
you to convert numbers from decimal to hex or to binary. This is useful
for working out dip switch settings. You need the VDU connected to use
this function.
Option C “Remove selected fix. from programmer” allows you to
remove from the programmer fixtures which are selected. This can be
useful if you have changed a fixture you didn’t want to include in a
memory – just select the fixture, then use this option.
Option D “De-Select fixtures” deselects all fixtures but does not clear
the programmer.
Option E “Highlight enabled” causes the selected fixture to light up
when stepping through selected fixtures using the sequence buttons or
arrow buttons; other fixtures in the selection go off. If this option is
disabled, the fixtures do not change when they are selected or
deselected.
Option G “Define the stage” lets you teach the Pearl how your lights
are set up so that you can use its 3D tracking mode. This is described
in the next section.
3.2.2
Training the console for Tracking mode
The Pearl can learn the layout of the stage and lights rig you are using.
This enables it to calculate where it needs to point each light so that
they all hit the same place on the stage. This is called Tracking mode
and it is a very powerful feature of the Pearl.
You need to mark a square on the stage, ideally the sides of the square
need to be half the depth of the stage but as long as it’s square and
you can point all the fixtures at the corners, the size is not that
important.
1>
Select all the fixtures you want to use for Tracking.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
3. Controlling dimmers and fixtures - Page 133
2>
Point all the fixtures so they light someone standing at the back
left hand corner of the square (don’t light a circle on the floor, or
your lights will be pointing at peoples’ feet all the time).
3>
Select option A “Top left”. This stores the positions.
4>
Point them all so they light someone standing at the back right
hand corner, then select option B “Top right”.
5>
Repeat for the front corners of the stage using options C and D to
store the positions.
6>
Press Enter to complete the process.
7>
The Pearl will go away and do lots of calculations. The top line of
the LCD shows the progress. This can take several minutes.
8>
Press ML menu then Softkey F to enable Tracking mode (option
shows [Tracking On (Off)] when tracking is enabled)
•
You can recall a position you have already set, if you want to edit
it, using F [Recall] then A B C or D to recall one of the positions.
•
You need to make sure you are lighting a person rather than
making a spot on the stage, because otherwise the beams will
cross over at the wrong place. If you can’t find a handy spare
person, use a plastic cup or a light coloured item of clothing over
the end of a mic stand at head height.
•
If you are using moving head fixtures, you need to ensure when
hanging them that the pan stop is on the side away from the
stage, or the fixtures will not be able to track over the whole stage
area. You also need to keep the Tilt value less than 50%, or the
heads may “flip” when you track into some areas.
•
Fixtures which have not been trained for Tracking will operate as
normal when tracking mode is enabled.
•
When Tracking mode is turned on, the VDU screen shows “T” in
the top right hand corner.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 134 - 3. Controlling dimmers and fixtures
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
4. Palettes - Page 135
C H A P T E R
4.
F O U R
Palettes
This chapter contains: About palettes; shared and individual palettes;
recalling a palette; storing a palette; palette masks.
When programming a show you will find that you frequently use certain
positions, colours, etc. Like an artist’s palette, the Pearl lets you store
these settings so you can recall them at the touch of a button rather
than having to find them on the wheels every time. There are 10 pages
of 20 palette entries. You can name the palette values so that you know
what you’re getting, and select them using the LCD display softkeys.
Also, when you patch a fixture, the Pearl loads 10 preset positions, 10
colours and 10 gobos into the palette for that fixture. This allows you to
recall specific colours and gobos without having to find them using the
wheels. The positions normally need to be edited before you can use
them.
4.1
Create
4.1.1
Palette values stored as a reference
The most important thing about palettes is that when you use a palette
value in a memory, the Pearl stores a reference to the palette, rather
than the actual value. This means that if you program your memories
using palettes, you can easily change all the positions just by
reprogramming a few palette entries rather than having to reprogram
all the memories. This is handy if you are touring a show and have to
cope with different stages or truss heights every show.
4.1.2
Shared and individual palettes
Palette entries can be shared or individual.
4.1.3
•
Shared: If there is only one fixture in the programmer (you have
only changed one fixture) when recording the palette entry, then
you can use that palette entry for all fixtures of the same type. So
you could save a value for “Red” on the first of your Wackylites™,
and then use that value for any of your other Wackylites. This is a
shared palette, useful for values which are the same for all the
fixtures of one type, such as colour, gobo, prism etc. The preprogrammed palettes are all shared.
•
Individual: If there is more than one fixture in the programmer
when recording the palette entry, then the entry is unique for each
fixture. So when you save an entry with pan/tilt positions for your
4 central Wackylites, those positions will only ever apply to those
fixtures. You can later add values for other fixtures; fixtures which
have no values saved will not change when the palette is recalled.
This is an individual palette, useful for values which vary for each
fixture, like pan, tilt and image focus.
Which attributes are stored in palettes
A palette entry can store any or all attributes of a fixture, so you could
store position, colour and gobo in the same palette entry. However, it’s
easier to operate the Pearl if you have some palettes for position, some
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 136 - 4. Palettes
for colour, some for gobo and so on. There are 200 palettes available so
you don’t need to mix them up.
4.1.4
Storing a palette
This is how you save a palette value:
1>
Press Clear to clear the programmer.
2>
Select the fixtures for which you want to store palette values.
Select one fixture only to record a shared palette entry.
3>
Using the attribute buttons and wheels, set the attributes you
want in the palette entry. You can store any or all attributes of a
fixture in each palette entry. Only attributes you have changed
will be recorded.
4>
Press the attribute button for the attributes you want to store (the
dimmer button will store all attributes). The buttons light up to
show you which attributes are going to be recorded. It’s best to
save only one type of attribute (e.g. Tilt/Pan)
5>
Press Store Palette, then type the palette number to be saved and
press Enter. You can also press one of the Flash buttons under the
1-30 preset faders to store the palette entry under that button
•
It’s easiest to recall palettes from the LCD menu. If you are saving
palettes to be recalled from the menu system, the palette
numbering is as follows:
Page
name
Colour
Gobos
Positions
Page 4
Page 5
Page 6
Page 7
Page 8
Page 9
Page 10
•
1st Screen
2nd screen
3rd screen
4th Screen
1-5
11-15
21-25
31-35
41-45
51-55
61-65
71-75
81-85
91-95
6-10
16-20
26-30
36-40
46-50
56-60
66-70
76-80
86-90
96-100
101-105
111-115
121-125
131-135
141-145
151-155
161-165
171-175
181-185
191-195
106-110
116-120
126-130
136-140
146-150
156-160
166-170
176-180
186-190
196-200
If you normally use the grey Flash buttons to recall palettes, then
you would use numbers 1-30. You can also change the fixture
page to access Palettes 31-60 (on page 1--), 61-90 (on page 2--)
and 91-120 (on page 3--). You need to enable User settings 5
(Palette Pages) to make the extra pages work, otherwise Palettes
1-30 are used on all four fixture pages.
4.2
Playback
4.2.1
Recalling a palette value
To recall a palette value, this is what you do:
1>
Select the fixtures to be changed. Shared palettes can be set to
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
4. Palettes - Page 137
any fixture of the same type. Individual palettes will set individual
values to each fixture.
4.2.2
2>
Select the attributes you want to recall from the palette. The
Dimmer attribute button will recall everything stored in the palette
(the LEDs on the buttons show you which attributes are active)
3>
Press the Focus button, then the
palette page you want if the
pages are displayed, then press
the softkey for the palette entry
you want (or Softkeys F and G go
up and down the list). The
selected attributes of the fixtures
will be set to the palette values.
The console will stay in “Apply
palette” mode until you press
Exit.
•
It’s easiest if you only save one
type of attribute (such as pan/tilt)
into each palette, then you can
just leave the Dimmer attribute
button selected when recalling
the palette. If you store a mixture
of attributes, you always have to
make sure that the correct
attributes are selected when
recalling a palette, and this is an extra step which you could do
without.
•
You can also use the grey Palette/Flash buttons below the preset
faders to apply palettes 1-30. While you hold the button, the top
line of the display shows the legend for the attribute (White,
Green etc). When you release the button, the palette is applied. If
you decide you don’t want to apply the palette, press the Focus
button before you release the grey Flash button.
•
You can recall a palette by number, type the palette number on
the keypad and press B [Recall palette].
Palette pages
If Palette Pages are turned Off (User Settings 5), palettes 1-30 are
available from the Palette/Flash buttons on every Fixture page. If the
option is On, then Fixture Page 0-- has palettes 1-30, Page 1-- has 3160, Page 2-- has 61-90 and Page 3-- has 91-120.
4.2.3
Setting a palette to all fixtures (Quick palette)
You can apply a palette to all patched fixtures. Ensure no fixtures are
selected, press Focus, then the palette page you want. Press the
softkey for the palette you want to apply. The palette will be applied to
all fixtures.
Alternatively, hold down one of the grey Palette/Flash buttons. The
palette legend will be displayed in the top line of the screen. When you
release the button, the palette will be applied to all fixtures. If you
decide you don’t want to apply the palette, press Focus before you
release the palette button.
User Setting 6 (Hold AVO and press softkey C) must be enabled for
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 138 - 4. Palettes
Quick Palettes to work.
4.2.4
Recalling only some attributes from a palette
You can recall only selected attributes out of a palette entry using the
Focus button. Press Focus, then select the attributes you want to recall
on the Attribute buttons, then enter the palette number.
You can change the way the attributes are grouped when saving or
recalling palette entries by selecting the attribute button to change,
then holding AVO and pressing softkey C to enter the User Settings
mode, then pressing C [Specify Attributes for Bank]. The buttons will
light to show which attributes are saved when that button is selected.
You can press the buttons to include or exclude attributes. Press Exit
twice to finish. If you do change these settings for any reason you
should change them back when you have finished to avoid confusion.
4.2.5
Setting a palette to fixtures in a memory (Filtered palette)
You can apply a palette to all fixtures in a memory, without having to
select the fixtures. Press Focus, then the palette page you want; then
hold down the softkey for the palette you want to apply, and press the
Swop button for the memory. When you release the palette key, the
palette will be applied to all fixtures in the memory.
4.3
Edit
4.3.1
Editing and deleting palettes
4.3.2
•
You can edit a palette entry by recalling it, making the changes
you want, then saving the new information back on top of the
existing palette entry. Anything you haven’t changed will not be
affected, values you have changed or added will be amended. You
can also use the Edit Palette button, which automatically selects
the fixtures used in the palette and performs a “Locate fixture” on
them.
•
You can remove attributes from palettes using the Off function,
see page 153.
•
You can delete a palette entry by pressing Delete, then Focus,
then type the palette number to be deleted and press Enter. (You
can also press Delete then the grey flash button for the palette
entry to be removed)
Naming a palette value or page
You can enter a legend for each palette value and for each palette
page. If you’re recalling the palettes using the LCD menu this is useful
so you know what you’re getting.
Palette legends can be different for each fixture type; the Pearl will
change the fixture type as you select different fixtures so that the
legends will match the fixture.
Alternatively, if you are happy for palette legends to be the same for all
fixtures, you can set the fixture type to “All”. The Pearl will then leave
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
4. Palettes - Page 139
the type set to “All” no matter what fixtures you select. Legends saved
with the fixture type set to “All” will be shown whenever the “All” fixture
type is selected.
You change the fixture type for which you are setting the legends using
softkey G [Set fixture type].
1>
Press D [Set Legend].
2>
Check the Fixture Type is correct (shown on the top line of the
display). Press G [Set Fixture Type] and select a fixture type to
set legends for a different fixture.
3>
Press B [Palette Page] to set a legend for a palette page, or C
[Palette] to set a legend for a palette entry.
4>
Find the entry you want to name using F [More] and G [Back] to
move through the pages
5>
Press the softkey for the entry you want to change.
6>
Type the legend using the external Qwerty keyboard and press
Enter to save.
You would typically use “All” if your palette legends are the same for all
fixtures and you don’t want to type individual palette legends in for all
your fixtures; this allows you to set the legend only once.
4.3.3
Viewing the contents of a palette
Press View, then Focus, then enter a Palette number. (Or press View
then a grey Palette/Flash button).
The palette contents will be displayed on the VDU screen. You can
change the attributes displayed by pressing the Attribute buttons.
For an Individual palette (a position palette is shown in the picture)
there will be a value for each fixture. For a Shared palette there will be
one value for each type of fixture.
4.4
Timing
4.4.1
Recalling a palette with a fade time
You can recall a palette with a fade time by typing a time (in seconds)
after you press Focus, before you recall the palette.
Recalling Palettes with a fade time is very effective when you are
running a show. However, if you use a fade time the palette does not
get put in the programmer, so you should not use fades when you are
programming.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 140 - 4. Palettes
Some attributes should not really be faded, so they are set to “instant”
in the fixture’s personality. The Pearl will never fade these attributes,
but will always snap them to a value.
A maximum of five timed palettes can be fading at any one time.
4.4.2
Master fade time
You can set a master fade time so that all palettes will fade over that
time.
1>
Press Focus.
2>
Press G [Options]. (If G shows [Pages] then press it to return to
the main Palette menu, then G will show [Options]).
3>
Press A [Set Master Time]
4>
Type the time in seconds and press Enter to save.
If you set a master fade time, no palettes will get put in the
programmer. If you are using palettes in your programming, ensure the
master fade time is set to zero.
If you have a master fade time set, and you also enter a fade time
manually, the manual time will override the master time.
If you don’t want palettes to get put in the programmer, which can be
useful when you are running a show, you can set this time to 0.1
seconds which will still apply the palette instantly but will then allow it
to be overridden by new memories being turned on.
4.5
Advanced options
4.5.1
Palette options
Press Focus then Softkey G [Options] to show the options menu. If a
palette page is displayed rather than the main palette menu and
softkey G is [Pages], press softkey G to get to the main palette menu.
A: Master time - Lets you set the time over which all palettes will be
faded, so you don’t have to keep entering a time. See page 140.
B: Fixture Type - Sets the fixture type for which the palette legends
are displayed (as the palette entries may be different for different
fixture types).
Normally the Pearl will change this automatically to match the fixtures
you have selected, so you won’t need to change it. If you select fixture
type “All”, then generic palette legends will be shown (legends saved
for the “All” fixture type), and the Pearl will not change the fixture type.
To return the fixture type selection to automatic, select a fixture type
other than “All”.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
5. Shapes - Page 141
C H A P T E R
5.
F I V E
Shapes
This chapter contains: Selecting a shape; changing the size and speed
of a shape; spreading a shape across multiple fixtures; editing shapes
which are running.
The Pearl, in common with other Avolites consoles, has a shape
generator. This allows you to quickly create exciting light shows using
lots of movement and changes, with the minimum of programming.
A shape is simply a sequence of values which can be applied to any
attribute of a fixture. A “circle” shape, for example, applied to the pan
and tilt attributes, would cause the fixture to move its beam around in
a circular pattern. You can set the centre point of the circle, the size of
the circle and the speed of the circle movement.
In addition to beam position shapes, there are a large number of other
shapes available in the Pearl. The shapes are defined for a particular
attribute such as colour, dimmer, focus and so on. Some shapes will
not work with some fixtures; focus shapes, for example, can produce
nice “focus pull” effects on fixtures which have DMX focusing, but will
do nothing on fixtures which don’t have focusing.
When you use a shape with more than one fixture, you can choose to
either apply the shape identically to all the fixtures, or offset them so
that the shape runs along the fixtures creating “wave” or “ballyhoo”
type effects. This is called the spread of the shape.
5.1
Playback
5.1.1
Selecting a shape
Selecting a shape is very similar to
selecting a value from a palette. When
you choose a shape, it will be applied
to all selected fixtures.
1>
Select the fixtures the shape is to
be applied to.
2>
Press G [Shape Generator].
3>
Press A [Playback a shape].
4>
Press one of the A-E softkeys to
apply a shape to the fixtures (or
the F and G softkeys go up and
down the list). The screen
describes the shape for each
button.
•
Most shapes are based on the
current settings of the fixture, so
a circle would move around the
current pan-tilt position of the fixture.
•
If the shape description says “Even” or “Parallel”, this describes
the Spread of the shape. You can always change this later.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 142 - 5. Shapes
5.1.2
•
You can change the base value of a shape (e.g. the centre of a
circle) by changing the attributes using the wheels in the usual
way. You can reduce the Size to zero (see next section) to help
you see what the base value actually is.
•
You can run more than one shape at a time by repeating the
above procedure. You can run several shapes on one fixture.
•
Press G [Shape Generator], then B [Edit a shape] to show what
shapes are running.
•
If you apply the same shape to two different groups of fixtures,
the shape will appear twice on the shape list. You can edit the two
shapes separately to give different directions, speeds etc (see
later)
•
You can remove shapes from fixtures which are selected by
pressing G [Shape Generator], then E [Remove shapes from
selected fixtures].
•
Each shape is designed to work on a particular attribute; the list
on the palette display shows you which attribute. Obviously if the
fixtures don’t have the attribute, you can’t use that shape on
those fixtures.
Changing the size and speed of a shape
It is easy to change the size and speed of a shape after it has first been
selected.
1>
Press G [Shape Generator] (if you are not already in the shape
generator menu).
2>
Press D [Set wheels to Size/Speed]
3>
The left hand wheel controls the Size. The right hand wheel
controls the Speed. The display shows the values.
Other things to know about size and speed of shapes:
5.1.3
•
If you have more than one shape running, the controls operate on
the most recent one. You can edit the parameters of any shape
that’s running using the Edit Shape function, see later in the
chapter.
•
The minimum size is zero. This will “hide” the shape, and the
fixture will resume its previous settings. The shape is, however,
still active.
•
The minimum speed is Stop. This will freeze the shape and will
offset the positioning of the fixture.
Spreading a shape across multiple fixtures
To get the maximum impact from a shape, apply it to several fixtures.
The Pearl has some powerful “Spread” functions which determine how
the shape is spread out across the fixtures.
This can vary from all fixtures moving identically (Coarse spread =
NONE), fixtures working in pairs (Coarse spread = 1) through to all
fixtures being distributed evenly through the shape, so the first fixture
is just starting the shape as the last one finishes (Coarse spread =
Even).
The “Fine” spread value introduces a smaller offset into the timing of
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
5. Shapes - Page 143
the shape across each fixture.
5.1.4
1>
In Shape Generator menu, press C [Set wheels to Spread].
2>
The left hand wheel controls the Fine Spread. The right hand
wheel controls the Coarse spread.
3>
Keep the Fine Spread at zero while you adjust the Coarse spread
to the desired value, or the output can get confusing.
•
The order in which you selected the fixtures before assigning the
shape determines how the shapes are applied; the “first” fixture is
the one you select first and the “last” fixture is the one you select
last.
•
If you select the fixtures using a group, the order in which you
selected the fixtures when recording the group is used.
Relative and Absolute shapes
Some shapes will operate on the current settings of the fixture; a Circle
shape, for example, will be centred around the current pan and tilt
positions of the fixture. This is called a relative shape. If you change
the pan and tilt of the fixture, the whole shape will be moved.
•
All Position (pan/tilt) shapes, and other shapes with “User” or
“Usr” in the name, are Relative shapes.
Other shapes always operate about a fixed value; a Rainbow shape, for
example, is centred at the midpoint of the colour mix attributes so that
a full range of colours is obtained. This is called an absolute shape.
The current settings of the fixture are overridden by the shape.
•
Non-position shapes (colour, gobo, focus, dimmer, iris) are usually
Absolute shapes, unless they have “User” or “Usr” in the name.
For example, “Magenta Even” is an absolute shape centred on
50% magenta, but “Magenta Even Usr” is a relative shape which
will change around the current Magenta value of the fixture.
If you run a memory containing a shape, when you turn the memory off
the shape will stop. The final state of the shape will be left as an offset
to the fixture settings. Option E of the Playback Parameters (see next
page) allows you to remove this offset when the shape stops and return
the fixture to its programmed settings.
5.2
Edit
5.2.1
Editing shapes which are running
The Shape Generator menu allows you to edit shapes which are running
using option B [Edit a shape]. This option lets you select which shape is
the “Active shape” (the one you can control the speed, size and spread
of with the wheels). You can’t edit shapes which are being played back
from a memory using this option, only shapes in the programmer.
1>
If you are not in the Shape Generator menu press Softkey G from
the main menu
2>
Press B [Edit a shape]
3>
Next to the softkeys is a list of shapes you can edit.
4>
Press a softkey to make the shape active. Active shapes are
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 144 - 5. Shapes
highlighted. You can make more than one shape active.
5>
Press Enter when you have finished
6>
The speed, size and spread controls will now affect all the shapes
you have set to be active.
Any changes you make to a shape will affect all fixtures which are
running that shape. If you applied the same shape several times to
different fixtures, you can change each copy of the shape
independently.
5.3
Advanced options
5.3.1
Shape options
The softkey options are:
A [Playback a shape]- Selects shapes, as previously described
B [Edit a shape] - Allows you to change speed, size and spread of
running shapes as described above
C [Set wheels to spread] - Sets the wheels to change the Spread of
the shape
D [Set wheels to size/speed] - Sets the wheels to change the size
and speed of the shape.
E [Remove shapes for selected fixtures] - This option is the only
way to turn off shapes for an individual fixture. Select the fixtures you
want to remove shapes from, then select this option. All shapes will be
removed from the selected fixtures.
F [Change direction] - The direction of the Active shape(s) will be
reversed.
G [Playback parameters] - This option lets you set parameters for a
shape stored in a playback / memory. When a memory fades in, you
can determine whether the shape should start at full size and speed
instantly, (Static) or whether the shape
speed and/or size should fade in as well
(Timed). If the memory mode is set to
0, the size and speed settings are
ignored.
1>
Press the swop button of the
playback you want to set the
parameters for
2>
The Pearl displays the current
settings in the main LCD window.
3>
A [Toggle Size] sets the Size to
Static or Timed
4>
B [Toggle Speed] sets the Speed to
Static or Timed
5>
C [Toggle Merge] sets the Shape
Merge option on or off (if you run
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
5. Shapes - Page 145
two playbacks applying shapes to the same fixtures, this option
allows you to merge the shapes or override previous shapes with
the latest one)
6>
D [Set memory to mode x] sets the current memory mode of the
playback. To activate options A & B, the memory mode needs to
be Mode 1 or 2. This is described in the next chapter.
7>
E [Toggle shape offset] allows you to remove the offset caused by
a shape when it is stopped. When you turn off a memory with a
shape, the fixtures will be offset by the last state of the shape.
Setting this option to “Removed” causes the fixture to return to its
programmed settings. Setting this option to “Remains” leaves the
shape offset in place.
The following table explains how the Size/Speed Static and Timed
options work, and how the memory mode affects these options.
5.3.2
Memory mode
Size option (softkey A)
Speed option (softkey B)
0
Static: Shape starts at
recorded size when fader
goes above trigger point
Timed: as static
Static: Shape starts at
recorded speed when
fader goes above trigger
point
Timed: as static
1
Static: As mode 0
Timed: Shape size grows
from zero to recorded
size as LTP channels fade
in (set by LTP fade time)
Static: As mode 0
Timed: Shape speed
rises from zero to
recorded speed as LTP
channels fade in (set by
LTP fade time)
2
Static: As mode 0
Timed: Shape size grows
from zero to recorded
size as fader position
moves from 0 to 100%
Static: As mode 0
Timed: Shape speed
rises from zero to
recorded speed as fader
position moves from 0 to
100%
Updating the shape file
If Avolites release an updated shape file, you will need to load it into
the Pearl. The shape file SG.DAT can be found on any personality disk,
which you can download from the Avolites website (see page 215).
Insert the floppy disk into the drive, turn the key to System, press G
[Utilities] then E [Load shape file].
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 146 - 5. Shapes
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
6. Memories - Page 147
C H A P T E R
6.
S I X
Memories
This chapter contains: HTP and LTP channels; how the Pearl works
when programming; recording a memory; playing back a memory;
changing playback pages; setting fade times for a memory; copying
and deleting memories; the include function; editing memories; the
“off” button; blind mode; recording the stage using snapshots; using
shapes in memories.
The Pearl has many functions for producing
a complex light show, and the most
fundamental part is a Memory, in which you
can store a “look” you have created using
your lights.
The Pearl has 450 playbacks, in 30 pages of
15, which can be used to store memories or
chases (sequences of “looks”). Chases are
covered in the next chapter. The playbacks
are controlled using the sliders and flash
buttons across the near edge of the console.
The roller is used to select the page of
memories or chases.
Playback faders & roller
Tiger: On the Pearl Tiger, you need to connect the Tiger “wing” to use
playbacks 11-15 on each page.
The memory functions on the Pearl are very powerful; the first part of
this section explains the basics of how the Pearl uses memories.
6.1
Create
6.1.1
How the Pearl works when programming
The Pearl has a special internal memory called the “Programmer”.
Whenever you change an attribute of a fixture, the changes are stored
in the Programmer. When you record a memory, the contents of the
programmer are stored in the memory. Nothing else from the console
output is stored.
The Pearl has two programming modes, “Record by Fixture” (the
normal mode) and “Record by Channel”. The mode can be changed
using Softkey B when saving a memory, or from User Setting 1 (hold
the AVO button and press C [User Settings]). The differences are:
•
Record by Fixture - When you change any attribute of a fixture,
all the other attributes are placed in the Programmer as well. You
will get exactly the result you expected when you recall the
memory, but you can’t combine memories containing the same
fixtures, because the new memory will just override the old one.
•
Record by Channel - Only the attribute you change is placed in
the programmer. This means you can save memories which only
contain position information, then recall them with other memories
to set colours, gobos etc. This is much more flexible but requires
more programming initially, because you need several memories
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 148 - 6. Memories
to get a result. It also lays you open to problems if you don’t keep
tabs on what you are doing. (This is known as Tracking mode on
other consoles).
When you press Clear, all fixtures are cleared from the programmer.
You should get into the habit of pressing Clear before you start to
program a memory, or you can end up recording fixtures you don’t
want. You also need to press Clear when you finish programming,
because any functions in the programmer will
override playbacks.
Attributes which are in the programmer are
shown with a “m” (modified by Preset), “w”
(modified by Wheel) or “P” (modified by
Palette) on the on-board output display. On the
VDU screen, attributes in the programmer are
displayed with a light blue (cyan) background.
Turning on a memory does not place the values
from the memory in the programmer (but the
Include function lets you do this, see page
152). The Locate Fixture function does not
place any values in the programmer either.
6.1.2
Creating a memory
The Pearl has 30 pages of 15 memories. The roller allows you to select
10 pages, and the buttons to the left of the roller allow 3 different
rollers.
1>
Press Clear to clear the programmer. This ensures that you are
starting with a clean slate.
2>
Set up the stage effect using the
fixtures. You can include shapes in
a memory. Remember that only the
fixtures you have changed will be
included in the memory.
3>
Press Memory.
4>
Empty memories will flash.
5>
Press the Swop button of a flashing
playback to record it. (Select a new
page first if you want to use a
different page).
6>
Press Clear to clear the
programmer. Repeat from 2 to
program more memories
Memory button
Other useful things to know about recording memories:
•
You can record the whole output of the console (not just what’s in
the programmer) by pressing A [Record Stage]. The option will
highlight when Record stage mode is active.
•
The roller has a segment above each playback fader to allow you
to write on the name of the memory using the low-tech but
reliable method of marker pen (use a strip of tape on the roller
surface). You can then see at a glance what’s in each memory.
•
You can also type in a legend for the memory, which is shown on
the VDU screen. Press D [Set Legend], then the playback Swop
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
6. Memories - Page 149
button, then enter a name using an external Qwerty keyboard.
The text is shown on the VDU screen. Press Enter to store it, then
Exit to finish.
6.1.3
•
You can also label the current playback page this way, by pressing
A [Current Page] instead of the playback Swop.
•
If you forgot to bring your Qwerty keyboard, you can use the
Swop buttons of Presets 1-26 for capital A-Z, and the Flash
buttons for lower case a-z (these keys are shown on the VDU
screen).
•
If you aren’t using a VDU screen, there is no point entering
memory legends as you can’t see them on the on-board display
(You can however see Page legends and Palette legends). If you
accidentally enter Set Legend mode you need to press Exit twice
to get the console back to normal mode.
Recording the stage using Snapshots
The Snapshot function allows you to instantly record the current output
of the console for later use. This can be useful if you suddenly create an
amazing effect on stage, but it’s a mixture of things you have changed
and things left over from the last memory.
When you take a Snapshot, any fixture which is lit up (has its dimmer
channel on), and any active dimmer channels are stored. You can later
retrieve the snapshots and copy them into memories.
The Pearl can store up to 50 snapshots. They are listed by time and
date, so if you write down the time when you store one, you will be
able to identify them later.
6.1.4
1>
Hold down the AVO button and press D [Snapshot Menu]. The
VDU screen shows “(x/50)” to tell you how many of the 50
snapshots are used.
2>
Press C [Take a snapshot of the stage] to record the output to a
snapshot.
3>
Press A [Load a snapshot] to load a previous snapshot into the
programmer. The VDU screen shows a list of stored snapshots.
Use the cursor keys or type the number of the one you want on
the numeric keypad, then press Enter. You can then save the
snapshot to a memory as usual.
4>
Press B [Delete a snapshot] to delete a snapshot from the list.
The VDU screen shows a list of snapshots, select the one you
want as for the Load option above.
•
You need to ensure that the Pearl’s internal clock is set correctly if
you are using Snapshots, or you will not be able to identify the
snapshots afterwards. See page 201 for how to set the clock.
Using shapes in memories
As you would expect, any shapes you have set up will be saved as part
of the memory.
If the base value of the shape is not in the programmer (e.g. the
central pan/tilt position, for a circle), and the shape is a “User” type,
then the memory will contain a “relative” shape. When you recall the
memory, the shape will start based on the current position of the
fixture. This allows you to create lots of different effects by layering a
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 150 - 6. Memories
few different memories - one for the shape, one for the base position.
You can either use “Record by channel” mode, and not set the position,
or use the “Off” function to achieve this effect.
6.1.5
Viewing the programmer contents
You can view the contents of the programmer on the VDU screen by
pressing View then G [VDU Views] (unless already in the VDU views
screen) then D [Programmer].
Down the left hand side of the window, a list of fixtures in the
programmer are displayed. Select the fixture you want to view using
the up and down arrow buttons.
In the right hand window, the attributes in the programmer for the
selected fixture are shown. A “P” indicates that a palette is in the
programmer rather than a DMX value set from the wheels.
6.2
Playback
6.2.1
HTP and LTP channels
The Pearl can treat control channels in two ways:
•
Dimmer or intensity channels work on the principle of “highest
takes precedence” (HTP). If an HTP channel is turned on at
different levels in several memories, the highest level will be
output. When you fade a memory, the HTP channels fade out with
it.
•
Moving light channels work on the principle of “latest takes
precedence” (LTP). The latest change takes over from any other
values, so the most recent memory to be turned on is the one
which is output. When you fade a memory, LTP channels do not
normally fade (though you can make them if you want, except for
channels set to Instant). They set their full values when the
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
6. Memories - Page 151
memory starts to fade in, and stay there until another value is set.
(You can set the value this happens at using the User settings
menu).
The fixture personality file tells the Pearl which channels of a fixture are
HTP and which are LTP. Normally, only dimmer attributes are HTP, and
everything else is LTP. If a fixture does not have an intensity control
channel, the Gobo channel is defined as HTP to make sure the fixture
blacks out when a memory is turned off.
6.2.2
Playing back a memory
To play back a memory, raise the fader. (Make sure there are no values
in the programmer by pressing the Clear button, because anything in
the programmer will override the playback).
6.2.3
•
You can turn on more than one memory at once.
•
All the HTP (intensity) channels in the memory will fade up with
the fader. The LTP (movement) channels will be set as soon as the
fader leaves the zero position. You can set the point at which this
occurs on the User settings menu. (If you have changed the
memory to be Mode 1 or 2, the LTP channels fade as well, except
for channels set to be Instant).
•
You can Flash the memory by pressing the grey flash button. You
can Swop (solo) the memory by pressing the blue Swop button
(all other active memories will turn off while the button is
pressed). The Flash and Swop buttons only operate in Normal Run
mode.
•
You can preload the fixture settings from the memory so that
there will be no unwanted movements when you raise the fader.
You must have the key set to Run mode to do this. Lower the
Add/Flash Master to zero and press the memory’s Flash button.
Changing playback pages
You can change pages to select another 15 memories simply by rolling
the Roller to a new segment. You can select 3 different pages of roller
using the Roller Page buttons giving 30 possible pages in all.
•
Playbacks which are turned on when you change page remain
active. The VDU screen shows the name of the active memory in
the bottom row, and the name of the memories from the new
page in the top row.
•
If you want to turn on a playback which is already on from a
previous page, lower the fader to zero then raise it again. The
memory from the previous page will turn off and the memory from
the new page will turn on.
•
You can label the current playback page by pressing D [Set
Legend], then A [Current page], then entering a label using the
Qwerty keyboard.
6.3
Edit
6.3.1
Editing a memory
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 152 - 6. Memories
You can edit any part of a memory you have already saved simply by
making the changes and saving the new information on top of the
memory.
6.3.2
1>
Press Clear to empty the programmer.
2>
Turn on the memory you want to edit, so you can see what you
are doing. Turn off all other memories to avoid confusion.
3>
Select the fixtures you want to change, and make the changes.
4>
Press Memory.
5>
Press the Swop button for the memory you are editing.
6>
The Pearl will display “A memory already exists on playback!”
7>
Press A [Merge memory] to amend the existing memory.
Unchanged information is not affected.
•
If you are in “Record by fixture” mode, all attributes of any fixture
you’ve changed will be saved in the memory with their current
settings. If you only want to save certain attributes of a fixture,
you need to use “Record by channel” mode (press softkey B after
pressing Memory).
•
You can overwrite the existing memory entirely using B [Replace
memory]. This wipes the playback and saves the current
programmer as a new memory.
•
If the memory contains shapes, and you have selected some new
shapes, the original shapes in the memory will be deleted (after a
warning). To get round this you need to use Include on the
original memory (see next section) to load the shapes into the
programmer. Ensure that the playback fader for the memory is at
zero (i.e. the shape is not active) when Including the memory.
The Include function
The Include function lets you load selected parts of a memory back into
the programmer. (Normally, only manual changes to fixtures are put in
the programmer). You can then use this to make a new memory. This
is useful if you want to make a memory which is similar to one you
already have.
You can also include DMX information from another console connected
to the DMX in socket.
When you use Include, you specify which attributes of which fixtures
you want to load into the programmer. So, for example, if you have a
memory which contains position, colour and gobo information for 8
fixtures, you can use the include function to load only the colour
information for 4 of the fixtures into the programmer. You could then
“Include” position information from another memory into the
programmer, and build up a new memory using information from
several existing memories.
1>
Select the fixtures from which you want to take settings.
2>
Press Include (above the numeric keypad).
3>
Select the Attributes you want to include. The Dimmer attribute
includes all other attributes (the buttons light up to show which
attributes will be included)
4>
Playbacks containing memories will be flashing
5>
Press the playback Swop button for the memory you want to
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
6. Memories - Page 153
include. Press Enter. The selected attributes of the selected
fixtures will be loaded into the programmer.
6.3.3
6>
Repeat from 2 to include other attributes from the same fixtures,
or repeat from 1 to include other fixtures.
•
If you want to put the whole memory into the programmer,
ensure no fixtures are selected and the Dimmer attribute is
selected, then press Include, then the Playback Swop button for
the memory to include. Everything will be placed in the
programmer.
•
If the memory contains shapes, all the shapes and all the fixtures
they are applied to will be loaded into the programmer, even if the
fixtures and attributes are not selected. The shapes can then be
edited, see page 143.
•
To Include DMX from the DMX In socket, press softkey A, B, C or
D to copy the incoming DMX values into the programmer for DMX
output lines A B C or D.
•
You can Include a Theatre Stack step to the programmer by
entering the step number you want to include and then pressing E
[Theatre Stack Step]. If you don’t enter a step number, the
current step is included.
•
You can edit the way the Attributes are grouped (e.g. the colour
function always selects the Yellow / Magenta / Cyan functions
too). This is called the “Focus Mask”. Select the attribute button to
change, then hold AVO and press C [User Settings] to enter the
User Settings mode, then press C [Specify Attributes for Bank].
The buttons will light to show which attributes are grouped. Press
the buttons to include or exclude attributes. Press Exit twice to
finish.
The “Off” button
The “Off” button allows you to remove an attribute which has been
stored in a memory, as if you never recorded it.
For example, suppose you recorded a memory which had scans at a
certain position, with the colour set to green. If you later decide that
you don’t want a colour recorded at all in the memory, so that the
previous colour setting of the scans will be used, you use the Off
function to turn off the colour in the memory. You can also use the Off
function to remove complete fixtures from a memory.
Using the Off button is not the same as recording an attribute at zero.
It is like not recording the attribute at all.
1>
Turn on the memory you want to edit, so you can see what you
are doing.
2>
Select the fixtures you want to change.
3>
Press the OFF button (one of the blue command buttons) to
display the Off menu.
4>
To switch off all attributes of the selected fixtures, press Softkey A
(this will remove the fixtures from the memory).
5>
To switch off selected attributes, press the appropriate attribute
button, then use Softkey B and C to set each attribute to Off (the
screen shows which attribute will be turned off for each button)
6>
Repeat from 3 to turn off other attributes, or from 2 to turn off
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 154 - 6. Memories
other fixtures.
6.3.4
7>
Press Memory.
8>
Press the Swop button for the memory you are editing to save the
changes. Unchanged information is not affected.
•
Attributes which are Off are shown on the screen. (The stage
output will not change as the output values remain at their last
settings).
•
Attributes or fixtures set to “Off” can be turned back on again by
selecting them in the usual way and changing them using the
wheels.
•
You can also use this function to turn off fixtures or attributes in a
palette entry. Use the procedure above, but instead of editing and
recording a memory, edit and record a palette entry instead. See
page 138 for how to do this.
Viewing a memory
You can view the contents of a memory by pressing View then the swop
button for the memory.
The main part of the display shows the attributes for each fixture stored
in the memory. Choose which attribute you are looking at using the
Attribute buttons. If a palette is stored in the memory, the palette
name is shown rather than the value.
Fixtures
Attribute values
6.4
Copy
6.4.1
Copying a memory
Palette stored in memory
Copying a memory is very simple on the Pearl. You can either create a
linked copy (if you change a linked memory, all others linked to it will
change too) or a “photocopy”, which is a completely new and
independent copy of the memory.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
6. Memories - Page 155
To create a linked copy:
1>
Hold down the Flash button of the playback you want to copy.
2>
If you want to copy to a different page, move the Roller to the
new page.
3>
Press the Swop button of the playback where you want to store
the copy. Release both buttons.
•
To create a Photocopy, press the blue Photocopy button before
pressing the playback Flash button
•
If you have named the memory you copied, the linked memory
will have the same name, as will a photocopied memory.
6.5
Delete
6.5.1
Deleting a memory
To delete a memory:
1>
Press the Delete button.
2>
Press the Swop button of the memory you want to delete.
3>
Press the Swop button again to confirm the delete.
•
If the deleted memory is linked to others, the linked memories are
not affected.
6.6
Timing
6.6.1
Setting fade times for a memory
You can set a fade in and fade out time independently for every
memory. The fades only affect HTP (intensity) channels. There is a
separate LTP timer which allows you to set movement times. LTP
channels which were set to “instant” during Patching (see page 122)
ignore LTP fade times.
1>
Press C [Edit Times].
2>
Press the Swop button of the playback you want to set times for
3>
Press Softkey C to set the fade in time, Softkey D to set the fade
out time, or Softkey E to set the LTP fade time (Options A, B, and
F have no effect on memories and are only used on chases)
4>
Type the new time using the numeric keypad and press Enter to
save it.
5>
Softkey G sets the memory mode of the chase to 0, 1 or 2
(described below).
6>
Press Enter to save the changes. If you press Exit, any times you
have set will be abandoned.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 156 - 6. Memories
The effect of the times is shown in the following picture.
The times you enter are also affected by the memory mode:
•
Mode 0 - No timing information is used. The settings on softkeys
C, D and E are ignored. The HTP channels fade with the 0-100%
position of the playback fader.
•
Mode 1 - Channels fade as set by the HTP and LTP fade times
(except Instant LTP channels). If you enter times for a Mode 0
memory, it will automatically change to Mode 1. If HTP times are
set to zero, the HTP levels will fade with the fader.
•
Mode 2 - HTP channels fade as set by the HTP times, or with the
fader if times are set to zero. LTP channels are controlled by the
fader position (except Instant channels). Set the LTP fade time to
0 to use this mode.
•
If the memory includes shapes, and you have set the shape size
or speed to “timed” (see page 144), then the shape will change
with the LTP channels. The changes will be timed for a Mode 1
memory and controlled by the fader position for a Mode 2
memory. This allows you to create a shape which gets bigger or
faster as you push up the fader.
6.7
Advanced options
6.7.1
Recording in Blind mode
The Pearl has a useful function called “Blind mode”, which allows you to
program memories without altering the output of the console. The
contents of the Programmer are saved on entering Blind mode, and
restored when you leave Blind mode. Any playbacks turned on continue
as normal, and you can make any changes you like without affecting
the output.
This is useful if for some reason you need to edit a memory in the
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
6. Memories - Page 157
middle of a show without upsetting the current lighting state.
Obviously, as you can’t see the changes you are making, you will need
to have a good idea of what values to set.
1>
Hold down AVO and press F [Blind Mode].
2>
If you don’t want to use the contents of the programmer, press
Clear.
3>
Make changes to your fixtures as usual. Use the screen or the
Graphics Tablet to help you set the right positions, colours etc.
4>
Save your changes as usual.
5>
To go back to normal, hold down AVO and press Softkey F again.
The previous contents of the programmer will be restored (the
contents of the programmer from Blind mode will be lost).
•
If you have edited a playback which is already turned on, you will
need to turn it off then on again to load the new version.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 158 - 6. Memories
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
7. Chases - Page 159
C H A P T E R
7.
S E V E N
Chases
This chapter contains: Programming a chase; running a chase; setting
speed, crossfade and direction; manually controlling the chase steps;
setting step times and unlinking; editing a chase using unfold; editing a
chase which is running; copying chases; sound activation of chases;
chase options.
As well as being used to store static memories, the playback faders on
the Pearl can also be used to store chases (sequences of static
memories).
7.1
Create
7.1.1
Programming a chase
To program a chase, you have to set up the lighting for each step of the
chase, then save it. The contents of the programmer are recorded as a
step.
You can either set all the fixtures and dimmers manually for each step,
or you can use Include to load in the information from memories you
have already recorded.
You cannot use an existing memory as a chase step just by turning it
on. You need to use the Include button to load the memory into the
programmer.
1>
Press the Chase button.
2>
Press the Swop button of the playback where you want to store
the chase.
3>
Set up the lighting for the first step, either manually or by using
“Include” on existing memories.
4>
Press the Swop button of the playback or Enter to store the
programmer contents as Step 1 of the chase.
5>
Press Clear (unless you want to re-use the contents of the
programmer), then repeat from step 3.
6>
Press Chase to finish when you have stored all the steps you
want.
•
Press Clear when you have finished saving the chase, otherwise
when you try to play it back the programmer will override the
chase and you won’t see the chase properly.
•
The current step number is displayed in the prompt line.
•
From the July 2004 software version, you can record shapes in a
chase. If the same shape is saved in subsequent steps it will
continue from step to step, if not it will stop at the end of the step
time. (The Pearl considers the shape to be the same if you didn’t
press Clear after the previous step, and didn’t change the speed,
size or spread of the shape from the previous step; or if you
Included the shape from the previous step and have not modified
it)
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 160 - 7. Chases
•
You can set a label for the chase by pressing D [Set Legend], then
pressing the Swop button for the chase, as with memories.
•
There is no limit to the number of steps in a chase provided there
is enough free memory in the Pearl.
7.2
Playback
7.2.1
Running a chase
To run a chase, raise the fader of the
playback. (You can also use the Flash/Swop
buttons if you are in Normal Run mode).
The chase will start to run.
•
The HTP (intensity) channels in the
chase will be controlled by the fader.
The other channels (LTP) will be set as
soon as the fader moves above zero
according to the LTP fade times
programmed in the chase. You can set
the point at which the LTP channels
activate from the User settings menu.
Wait timer
Step time
Fade timer
Crossfade
•
The bottom part of the display shows the progress of the chase.
The Wait and Fade times are represented by bar graphs. The top
line represents the Fade in time; the middle line the Fade Out time
and the bottom line the LTP fade.
•
Press View then Connect to show details of the chase steps on the
screen (this screen is described in the Timings section on page
165).
•
You can preload the fixture settings to match the first step of the
chase so that there will be no unwanted movements when you
raise the fader. You must have the key set to Run mode to do this.
Lower the Add/Flash Master to zero and press the chase’s Flash
button.
There are many options you can set to determine the way the chase
runs and these are described in the rest of this chapter.
7.2.2
Connecting a chase to the controls
When you run a chase, the playback controls are automatically
connected to it. If you turn on a second chase, the controls are
connected to the newer chase.
7.2.3
•
You can choose which chase is connected to the controls by
pressing the Connect button (next to the wheels), then the swop
button for the chase you want to control.
•
You can turn off the “chase autoconnect” option in the User
Settings menu (hold down AVO and press C, then set Option 4) if
you don’t want the wheels to connect to a chase when you start it.
You will have to use the Connect button to control the chase if you
do this.
Setting speed, crossfade and direction
The wheels are normally assigned to control the Speed and Crossfade
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
7. Chases - Page 161
of the chase when you turn it on.
You can save a speed with the chase, so that every time you play it
back, it runs at the same speed.
1>
Press A [Chase Parameters].
2>
Set the speed you want using the left hand wheel.
3>
Press A [Save Speed].
•
If you are in Run mode, you can also set the chase speed by
tapping G [Tap twice to set speed] in time with the music.
•
You can change the speed display to BPM (beats per minute)
rather than seconds, from the User Settings menu (see page 201).
•
If you are doing another operation using the wheels while running
a chase (e.g. manually positioning some fixtures), you can make
the wheels control speed and crossfade again by pressing the
Connect button next to the wheels, then the swop button for the
chase.
•
You can set the chase back to its programmed speed by pressing
Connect, then A [Clear temporary speed].
The chase direction is controlled by the  (backwards),
(forwards)
and  (Bounce) buttons. These buttons can also be assigned as
Fixture control buttons (see page 127). Hold down the Avo button and
press Softkey B so the display shows [Chase Control Enabled] to use
the buttons to control the chase direction.
•
7.2.4
You can save the current direction of the chase so it will always
start in that direction; Press A [Chase Parameters], then B [Save
Direction].
Manually controlling the chase steps
You can take manual control over the connected chase by pressing the
Stop button. If the chase is set to “Links Off”, it will do this
automatically - see the next section for details on Links.
•
Press the Go button to restart playback of the chase
•
The Snap Back button changes the chase direction the first time
you press it; a second press will jump back a step (times and
fades are ignored)
•
To set the “next” step to be a particular step number, type the
step number on the numeric keypad then press Connect.
•
Turn either wheel to manually control the fades for this step. You
can fade up or down until the fade completes; once a fade has
completed it stays at 100%. Once the Fade In, Fade Out and LTP
fades are all completed the chase will move on to the next step.
The display above the wheel shows the fade up and fade down of
the previous step as a percentage. This function can be disabled
using the chase parameters menu.
•
The  and
buttons (next to the Go button) change the direction
of the chase. If the chase is stopped, these buttons jump
backwards and forwards a step.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 162 - 7. Chases
7.2.5
Viewing chase steps
You can preview the output of a chase
step on the display. The chase does
not have to be connected or running.
1>
Press View.
2>
Press the Swop button of the
chase to view.
3>
Choose the attribute to view by
pressing one of the Attribute
buttons.
4>
Use softkeys F and G to step
through the chase, or type a new
step number and press Enter.
•
Values with a “P” indicate that a
palette has been stored in the
step; the number is the palette
number.
You can view the steps of a connected chase by pressing View then
Connect. See page 167.
7.3
Edit
7.3.1
Adding more steps to the end of a chase
You can add steps to the end of a chase by pressing Chase, then the
Swop button of the chase, and saving more steps in the same way as
you did when creating the chase. New steps you save will be added
onto the end of the chase.
7.3.2
Inserting steps into a chase
You can insert a new step into a chase using the blue Insert button.
The chase must be connected.
1>
Turn on the chase, or press Connect and the chase’s Swop button.
2>
Set up the lights how you want them for the new step.
3>
Press the blue Insert button.
4>
Type in the step number for the new step and press Enter (the
number is shown on the top line of the display). For example to
put a step in between 2 and 3, enter a step number of 2.5.
5>
Set the timing for the new step (see section 7.6) and press Enter,
or just press Enter to insert the step with the default timing.
6>
Repeat from 4 to insert another step, or press F [Press to quit
insert] to end.
You can renumber all steps in the chase to whole numbers by pressing
A [Renumber] while in the chase step insert menu.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
7. Chases - Page 163
7.3.3
Editing a chase using Unfold
The Pearl has a powerful chase editing
system. The Unfold button places each
step of a chase on one of the playback
faders as if each step was a memory,
allowing you to turn on and edit each
step individually.
Tiger: If a chase has more than 10
steps, the Tiger Wing must be
connected to access steps 1115 on each page.
The display (right) shows the step
number, step legend, whether the
step is Simple or Complex, and
whether links are turned off (-) or on
(down arrow).
1>
Press Unfold (one of the blue
command buttons), then the
Swop button of the chase to be
edited
2>
The first 15 steps of the chase are loaded into playback faders 115. The display shows details about the steps.
3>
Raise a playback fader to output the contents of that step (fade
times will operate as programmed)
4>
Various Unfold options are available, the details are below.
5>
Press Unfold again to get out of unfold mode.
•
To edit the contents of a step: Press Clear to empty the
programmer, raise the fader to output the step, make the
changes, press A [Record], then the Swop button (1-15) for the
step number.
•
To change the times for the step, press B [Edit Times], then the
flash button for the step, then set the times (see Timing on the
following page)
•
To Insert a new step, set up the lights for the new step, press C
[Insert], then the Swop button where you want to insert the new
step. The new step will be allocated to the button you press with a
step number half way between the steps either side, and all other
steps will be shifted along one. (You cannot use the blue Insert
button in Unfold mode).
•
To Delete a step, press D [Delete] then the Swop button for the
step you want to delete, followed by Enter.
•
You can copy a step by holding the Flash button of the step to
copy, then pressing the Swop button of the step to copy it to.
•
You can renumber the chase to whole numbers by pressing C
[Insert], A [Renumber], then Enter to confirm.
•
If the chase has more than 15 steps, you can swap to the next 15
steps using softkey F, or the previous 15 steps using softkey E.
•
G [Shape Generator] allows you to insert and edit shapes in the
chase steps.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 164 - 7. Chases
7.3.4
Editing a chase which is running
You can also edit chase steps while you are running the chase, without
using Unfold. Make sure the step you are editing is not in the middle of
a fade, or you might get unexpected results next time you run the
chase.
1>
Start the chase by raising the fader. (if Links are On, press the
Stop button to pause the chase)
2>
Keep pressing the Stop button to step on to the step you want, or
type the step number you want, press Connect then Stop.
3>
Press Clear to make sure the programmer is empty.
4>
Make the changes that you want to the current step.
5>
Press Rec. Step, then Enter, to save the changes to the step.
6>
Press the Stop button to Pause the chase, then press Next or Prev
to move through steps of the chase.
•
You can set individual times for each step using the Live Time
button as follows:
1>
Stop the chase on the step you want to set, as above.
2>
Press the Live Time button to set the times for the current step,
or the Next Time button for the next step. The Live and Next step
numbers are shown on the display.
3>
Use softkeys A-G to set the times you want (see page 155 for
description of the times)
4>
Press Enter to save the settings, Exit to abandon them, or the ML
Menu button to toggle the step mode between Simple/Complex
(Simple = use the global timings).
5>
Press the Stop button to Pause the chase then press Next or Prev
to move through steps of the chase. .
•
The Review button shows you the step you have just edited,
including all the fades. When you press Review, the chase jumps
back to the step before the one you are on, then runs the step you
have edited to show you the overall result. The chase does not
have to be stopped to use Review.
7.4
Copy
7.4.1
Copying chases
You can copy a chase exactly the same as a memory – hold down the
Flash button of the chase you want to copy, then press the Swop
button of the playback you want to copy it to. The copied chase will be
linked to the original, and any changes made to either chase will affect
both chases.
If you want an unlinked copy, press the Photocopy button before
starting the copy.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
7. Chases - Page 165
7.5
Delete
7.5.1
Deleting chases
You can delete a chase exactly the same as a memory. Press the blue
Delete button, then press the Swop button of the playback containing
the chase. Press the swop button again to confirm the delete.
7.5.2
Deleting a step from a chase
You can delete a step from the connected chase by pressing the blue
Delete button, typing the step number to be deleted, pressing Enter
then A [Yes].
You can also delete a step when a chase is Unfolded by pressing D
[Delete] then the Swop button for the step you want to delete.
7.6
Timing
7.6.1
Speed and crossfade controlled by wheels
The speed and crossfade of the most recently turned on chase is
controlled by the wheels. You can “connect” the wheels to a different
chase by pressing the Connect button and then the Swop button of the
chase you want to connect.
7.6.2
Setting global step or fade times and unlinking
You can set step times globally for the whole chase and individually for
each step. You can also unlink the steps, either for the whole chase or
for individual steps, so that the chase pauses and waits for you to press
the Go button. This can be useful if you are using the console for
theatrical lighting cues (although it’s easier to use the dedicated
theatrical mode for this).
To set the global times for a chase:
1>
Press C [Edit Times], then the playback button for the chase.
2>
Press Softkey A-F to select the time parameter to set (the times
are described below).
3>
Type the new time value using the numeric keypad and press
Enter
4>
Press G to set Link on or off for the whole chase. If link is on the
chase runs automatically. If off, you run each step manually using
the Go button (a chase like this is called a “stack”).
5>
Press Enter when you have finished. If you press Exit, any
changes you have made will be lost.
The times are:
A [Wait In] - Delay before the fade in starts
B [Wait Out] - Delay before the fade out starts
C [Fade In] - Time to fade in
D [Fade Out] - Time to fade out
E [LTP Fade] - Time for the LTP (movement) channels to fade over
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 166 - 7. Chases
F [LTP Wait] - Delay before the LTP channels start to move
•
7.6.3
You can enter minutes as part of the time - press the decimal
point twice, a colon (:) will appear. e.g. to enter 20 mins 10.5
seconds, type 20..10.5 (the display will show 20:10.5).
Setting times and links for individual steps
You can set the fade in and fade out times independently for each
step/cue. Chase steps with individual times are called Complex steps, if
they use the global settings they are called Simple steps. To set
independent times it’s easiest to use Unfold, but you can also stop the
chase and use the Live Time button as described on page 164.
1>
Press Unfold then the playback swop button for the chase.
2>
Press B [Edit Times], then the playback swop button for the chase
step you want to set
3>
Press Softkey A-F to select the time
parameter to set, and type the time
value (as described above).
4>
Press G to set Link on or off
5>
Press Enter when you have finished. If
you press Exit, any changes you have
made will be lost.
•
Any changes you make will
automatically change the step to a
Complex step.
•
If you want to return the step to be a
Simple step, using the global times
and link settings, press the ML Menu
button while in the Edit Times screen
until that the display top line shows
“<ML> Save as Simple” (you may
have to press it twice), then press
Enter. Any times you have set will be
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
7. Chases - Page 167
deleted.
7.6.4
Viewing timing information
You can view the timing settings of a connected chase by pressing
View then Connect. (when View is set to LCD views; if the top line of
the display shows “VDU views” when you press View, press G [LCD
views])
For each step, the first line shows the step number, whether links are
off or on for that step (Off=”-”, On=down arrow), and whether the step
is Simple (S) or Complex (C).
The second line shows the Wait In, Wait Out and LTP Wait times for the
step.
The third line shows the Fade In, Fade Out and LTP fade times for the
step.
The active step is always at the top of the list, and the list moves up as
the chase runs.
A similar display can be shown on the VDU screen by pressing View,
then G [VDU
“Wait In” progress
views] then
Connect.
Next step number
Chase number
At all times when
Current step number
a chase is running,
the bottom of the
screen shows
bargraphs which
show the progress
of the wait and fade times.
LTP Wait progress
“Wait Out” progress
“Fade In” progress
The left hand section of the bargraphs
shows the Wait timers. The right hand
section shows the Fade timers.
To the left of the bargraphs are
numbers which give the wait or fade
progress as a countdown from 9 to 0.
LTP fade progress
“Fade Out” progress
The bottom left of the VDU screen shows similar bargraphs when a
chase is running. The progress figures are to the right of the bargraphs
and are given as a
Fade timers
Progress %
Wait timers
99 to 00 countdown.
“N” is the next step
and “L” is the live
step.
7.6.5
Sound activation of chases
The Pearl can use bass, mid or treble frequencies from its audio input
to trigger chases. You can select whether the chase will step on low
frequencies, mid frequencies or high frequencies.
1>
Turn on the chase (or Connect it) and press A [Chase parameters]
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 168 - 7. Chases
2>
Press E [Sound to Light] to select Low, Mid or High trigger.
3>
Turn the key to Run mode and press E [Enable sound to light]
(this is the global Sound to Light enable).
3>
When the chase is turned on, it will step in time to the sound
signal
4>
Press E, again, to turn off sound activation.
•
Turn the chase links Off and set fade times to zero to get a true
sound to light chase.
•
You can make some linked steps and some unlinked steps to give
a chase which runs on a few steps for every audio pulse.
•
The sensitivity of the audio input can be set using an internal PCB
jumper to enable use of a microphone rather than line level audio.
See page 110.
7.7
Advanced options
7.7.1
Chase options
Each chase has options which can be set to affect the way it runs. Press
A [Chase Parameters]. You need to have a chase “connected”, or the
softkey will not do anything. The options you set are individual for each
chase.
The options are:
A [Save Speed] - saves the current speed of the chase (set using the
left hand wheel)
B [Save Direction] - save the direction of the chase (set using the
direction / bounce buttons or options, see below)
C [Normal / Random] - turn on random mode (steps are executed in
random order) - press to change the mode. Turn off random mode
when editing a chase, or you won’t know which step you are going
to get next.
D [Stop on final step] - makes the chase stop on the final step. If the
final step is a blackout, the chase will appear to turn itself off, so
you can just press Go whenever you want to make it happen again
E [Sound to light] – as described above
F [More…] – Gives a second screen of options
A [Fader start options] - (press the button to cycle through the
options):
Fader will reload chase (every time you turn on the chase it starts at
step 1)
Fader stops, go to start chase (the chase will not run until you have
pressed Go after you turn on the chase)
Fader stops/starts chase (every time you turn on the chase it continues
from where it left off)
B [Skip times options] – Allows you to skip the first wait and/or fade
of a chase. You often want to do this so the chase starts as soon as
you raise the fader. (Press the button to cycle through options)…
Skip first wait time (The wait time is missed when the chase is first
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
7. Chases - Page 169
turned on)
Skip first wait and fade time (Both wait and fade times are missed
when the chase is first turned on)
Wait and Fade for all steps
C [Manual mode allowed / disallowed] – If set to Allowed, lets you
manually fade a paused step by turning the left hand wheel for the
HTP channels and the right hand wheel for the LTP channels.
D [Speed wheel allowed / disallowed] - Lets you change the chase
speed using the left hand wheel. You might want to turn this off if
you don’t want the console operator to be able to change chase
speeds at playback time.
E [Takeover after Go] - If this option is Disabled, when you have a
chase waiting for the Go button, and you turn on a memory, the
LTP channels will change to those set in the memory. When you
press the Go button, the LTP channels will remain set as in the
memory and will not update to the settings in the chase step.
When the option is enabled, the LTP channels will update to the
settings in the chase step when you press Go.
For example, you are about to press Go to set some fixtures to
Red. You turn on a memory, which sets the same fixtures to Blue.
If the Takeover After Go option is enabled, then pressing Go will
set the fixtures to Red, otherwise the fixtures will remain in Blue.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 170 - 7. Chases
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
8. Theatre stack - Page 171
C H A P T E R
8.
E I G H T
Theatre stack
This chapter contains: Setting theatre mode; theatre controls; plotting
a cue; naming a cue; setting fade times; jumping to a cue; running a
theatrical show; advanced options.
Theatre mode allows you to use the Pearl like a standard theatrical
console, where you program your show as a sequence of cues, then run
the show just by pressing the Go button at the appropriate moment.
Playback faders 12-15 become dedicated cue masters.
Tiger: On the Pearl Tiger, playbacks 12-15 on the optional Fader Wing
are used for the Theatre Masters. If you do not have the
optional Wing, you can change internal links to also use
playbacks 7-10 on the main console as the cue masters. See
page 212 for details of the links.
8.1
Create
8.1.1
Setting theatre stack mode
In program mode, press B [Theatre stack programming]. The Pearl
displays the theatre mode startup display. Press Enter to start.
8.1.2
•
When theatre mode is enabled, you can’t access playbacks 12-15
on any page; if you intend to use Theatre mode it is advisable not
to program these playbacks. Any programs are kept and when you
turn off Theatre mode you will be able to access them again.
Chase Autoconnect mode is disabled when theatre mode is turned
on; the theatre stack is always connected to the controls.
•
To get out of the theatre menu, press G [Quit]. The Exit button is
disabled in the theatre menu. This does not turn off theatre mode,
but allows you to use the rest of the console.
•
To turn off theatre mode completely, at the main menu (not the
Theatre menu) press B [Theatre stack programming], then press
D [Exit Theatre Programming].
•
Theatre mode programming is not deleted when theatre mode is
turned off.
•
While theatre mode is enabled, the swop button for Playback 12
will flash when the playback fader is at zero.
Theatre controls
While theatre mode is turned on, Playback faders 12-15 have special
functions assigned to them.
Fader 12 is the Master fader, controlling the overall intensity of all
lights.
Fader 13 controls the Fade In of the next step, when it is stopped.
Fader 14 controls the Fade Out of the previous step, when it is stopped.
Faders 13 and 14 operate as crossfaders.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 172 - 8. Theatre stack
Fader 15 controls the LTP fade timer, when it is stopped.
The Swop and Flash buttons above 13, 14 and 15 are Stop and Go
buttons for each of these functions.
8.1.3
Plotting a cue
Plotting a cue is very similar to saving a memory. You need to be in
Program mode to record cues.
The Pearl refers to cues as “Steps”.
1>
If you are not already in “Theatre mode” press B [Theatre Stack
Programming] at the main menu.
2>
Press Clear to make sure the programmer is empty.
3>
Set up the cue, either using the preset faders or typing in the
levels for each channel (see page 129). You can also select
fixtures and use the wheels and attribute buttons to set up the
cue.
4>
If the current step number on the display is different to the one
you want to use, type the step (cue) number
5>
Press D [Record], then B [Record Stage] to record the current
output of the console, or D [Record programmer] to just record
what you have changed in step 3.
6>
If there are no steps, the Pearl will ask for the number of the first
step. Type 1 and press Enter.
7>
Press Clear.
8>
Repeat from 3 to plot more cues.
•
The Pearl will automatically allocate whole numbered cue numbers
as you save cues. You can number cues 1.1, 1.2 and so on, this
allows you to insert up to 9 cues in between existing cues without
changing the numbers.
•
The top line of the display shows the Current Step number. This is
the step (cue) which will be used for recording or editing. If you
type in a step number this is shown as the Input Step.
•
Softkey A [Record Mode] sets the console to Record By Fixture or
Record by Channel. This is described on page 147.
•
B [Record Stage] will record the whole output of the console, as
you see it. This is useful if you want the cue to represent exactly
what’s on the stage. D [Record Programmer] will record only what
you have changed since you last pressed Clear.
•
You can use an existing memory to form a cue by either using
Include (see page 152) or, if you only want dimmer levels, just
turn the memory on and use the [Record Stage] option.
•
Cues can include moving light positions and shapes. Use softkey B
to set up shapes (see page 141), and use D [Record Programmer]
in the record menu to record it in the cue (if you use B [Record
Stage] the shape will not be recorded). The shape will stop when
the next cue starts, unless it is also recorded (unchanged) in the
next cue.
•
The cues you have saved are displayed on the VDU screen. You
can also display them on the LCD screen by pressing View then
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
8. Theatre stack - Page 173
Connect (next to the wheels) .
•
8.1.4
If you want to run a chase from a cue, you can use an Autoload to
do this (see section 8.4)
Running a chase or memory with a cue (Autoload)
If you want to run a chase as part of a cue, or automatically turn on an
existing memory, you can assign an Autoload to the step.
Autoloads can either turn on or turn off a playback. A Fade Up autoload
will turn on a playback, a Fade Down autoload will turn it off.
1>
Press A [Advanced].
2>
Press B [Assign a fade up autoload] or C [Assign a fade down
autoload]
3>
Press the Swop button of the playback to be turned on (or off).
The playback will turn on when the cue runs and will remain turned on
until a Fade Down autoload turns it off.
8.1.5
•
Each cue can have only one autoload, either a fade up or a fade
down.
•
The memory to load can be from any page, but it will be loaded
into the same playback number that it is saved in. If this playback
is active on the current page, it will be turned off and replaced by
the autoload memory.
•
Autoloads are shown on the right hand side of the VDU screen. A
fade up autoload has an up arrow, a fade down autoload has a
down arrow.
•
You can set a fade time for the autoload using D [Set autoload
fade time]. Type the fade time then press Enter. Fade times only
work to the nearest second.
•
You can delete the autoload from the current cue by pressing E
[Delete Autoload] then pressing Enter.
Naming a cue
Type the step number to be named, then press E [Set Legend]. Enter
the legend on the QWERTY keyboard. While you are typing, the input is
shown on the VDU screen.
The name of the live cue and the next cue is displayed in the cue list on
the VDU screen.
8.2
Timing
8.2.1
Setting fade times for a cue
Each cue can be programmed to have its own Fade In and Fade Out
times. You can also set a separate fade time for LTP (movement)
channels in the cue, and you can set wait times to delay the start of the
fade.
Press C [Set Times] to set the timing for the current step/cue. To set
the times for a different cue, type the cue number before pressing C
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 174 - 8. Theatre stack
[Set Times]. to show the options.
You can also press the Live Time button (next to the wheels) to set the
times for the current step.
1>
Press Softkey A-F to select the time parameter to set (the times
are described below).
2>
Type the new time value using the numeric keypad and press
Enter
3>
Press G to set Link on or off. If link is On the next cue will run
automatically after the Wait Out time. If off, you run each step
manually using the Go button.
4>
Press Enter when you have finished. If you press Exit, any
changes you have made will be lost.
The times are:
A [Wait In] - Delay (after you press Go) before the fade in starts
B [Wait Out] - Delay (after you press Go for the next cue) before this
cue starts to fade out
C [Fade In] - Time to fade in
D [Fade Out] - Time to fade out
E [LTP Fade] - Time for the LTP (movement) channels to fade over
F [LTP Wait] - Delay before the LTP channels start to move
8.2.2
•
Links are set to OFF by default, so that you press the Go button
for each cue. If you set links to On for a cue, the next cue will run
automatically after the “Wait Out” time.
•
You can enter minutes as part of the time - press the decimal
point twice, a colon (:) will appear. e.g. to enter 20 mins 10.5
seconds, type 20..10.5 (the display will show 20:10.5).
Displaying the cue timings
Press View then Connect to display
the cue timings on the LCD screen.
When you are in theatre mode, the
cue timings are permanently
displayed on the VDU screen.
The list of cues automatically
moves so that the current step is
at the top.
For each step, the first line shows
the step number, whether links are
off or on for that step (Off=”-”,
On=down arrow), and whether the
step is Simple (S) or Complex (C)
(theatre stack steps are always
Complex.)
The second line shows the Wait In,
Wait Out and LTP Wait times for
the step.
The third line shows the Fade In, Fade Out and LTP fade times for the
step.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
8. Theatre stack - Page 175
8.3
Playback
8.3.1
Running a theatrical show
If you have just been editing, you may need to type 1 then F [Cut to
Live] to set the console to cue 1. You should also turn the key to “Run”
to make sure you can’t accidentally change anything.
The LCD display shows the
current (live) cue/step and the
next cue/step numbers. To the
right of this, bargraphs show
the progress of the fades (see
page 167 for more detail on
the bargraphs).
In HTP Fade
Out HTP Fade
Next Step
Live Step
The VDU screen shows a list of
the cues with legends if you
have entered them. The
current cue is highlighted with
a grey background and bright
lettering. The next cue is highlighted in light blue.
LTP Fade
For automatic cues, you can simply press the Go button next to the
wheels. The console will carry out the fade with the times you
programmed.
If you want to manually control a fade, you can use the in, out and LTP
faders (13, 14 and 15) or Go/Stop buttons to operate the cue. The
display shows the percentage of fade left to go. When the fade is
completed for that fader, the display shows “0”. When Fade In, Fade
Out and LTP all show “0”, the console moves on to the next cue. (The
picture above shows the in, out and LTP fade displays all at halfway, or
“5”)
Once the display shows “0” you cannot reverse the fade using the
fader.
•
You can jump to a step by typing the step number on the keypad
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 176 - 8. Theatre stack
then pressing Connect (next to the wheels). The cue is loaded but
does not start until you press the Go button.
•
When the Add/Flash master is at zero, the Theatre Stack Go
function of the playback Flash buttons is disabled. When the Swop
master is at zero, the Stop function of the blue playback swop
buttons is disabled.
8.4
Edit
8.4.1
Editing a cue
You can edit a cue you have saved as follows:
8.4.2
1>
Press Clear.
2>
Ensure the Dimmer attribute is selected.
3>
Press Include (above the numeric keypad)
4>
Press E [Include Theatre Stack Step]
5>
Type the step number to be edited and press Enter.
6>
Make the changes you want using the preset faders or by entering
new levels.
7>
Press D [Record], then D [Record programmer].
8>
Press Clear to clear the programmer. The cue will be updated.
Jumping to a cue
You can change the cue being edited by typing the cue number then
pressing Enter. If you want to output this cue, press F [Cut to Live]
(fade times are ignored).
8.4.3
Inserting a cue
You can insert a cue between two existing cues by typing a cue number
in between the two existing cues when saving the step.
8.4.4
Renumbering cues
Press A [Advanced] then A [Renumber], then F [Yes], to renumber all
the steps to whole numbers.
8.4.5
Copying a cue
Press A [Advanced] then F [Copy current step to…], type the number
for the new cue and press Enter.
8.5
Delete
8.5.1
Deleting a cue
Press the blue Delete button, then type the step number to be deleted
and press Enter.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
8. Theatre stack - Page 177
You can delete all steps by pressing A [Delete All Steps].
8.6
Advanced options
8.6.1
Advanced theatre options
Press A [Advanced] to display the Advanced theatre options menu.
The options are:
A [Renumber] – Renumbers all cues to whole numbers.
B [Assign a fade up autoload] – Assigns a memory or chase which
will be automatically loaded and run when the fade-in for the cue
starts.
C [Assign a fade down autoload] – Allows you to turn off a memory
or chase when the cue starts.
D [Set autoload fade time] – Allows you to set a fade time for the
autoload.
E [Delete autoload] – Deletes the autoload memory from the current
cue.
F [Copy current step to…] – Allows you to copy the current step to a
new step.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 178 - 8. Theatre stack
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
9. The graphics tablet - Page 179
C H A P T E R
9.
N I N E
The graphics tablet
This chapter contains: Connecting the graphics tablet; using the tablet;
selecting fixtures on the tablet; changing the position of the fixtures;
changing colours and other attributes; storing palette entries; other
functions.
The graphics tablet is an accessory to the Pearl. On “Touring” models it
is fitted in the flightcase to the right of the console. It allows you to use
a pen (or a puck) to select fixtures, groups, colours, and position the
fixtures by simply drawing with the pen. When you use the Pearl’s
Tracking mode you can instantly make all your fixtures point at one
place on the stage just by pressing on the tablet.
The tablet makes programming and operating a show on the Pearl
much more intuitive. If you don’t have a graphics tablet you’re missing
out!
tracking & position
mode pads
stage position
area
position palette
pads
Colour mix
luminosity
attribute
pads
group recall
pads
focus (palette)
pads
fixture
select pads
attribute
fader
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
programming
functions
Page 180 - 9. The graphics tablet
9.1
Create
9.1.1
Connecting the tablet
The tablet is connected to the Serial port on the Pearl. It is powered
through the serial port. You must turn off the Pearl when connecting
the tablet. The pen or puck should also be plugged into its socket on
the rear of the tablet. Some tablets have an on/off switch on the rear.
The power LED on the tablet should be lit, and when you touch the pen
to the tablet surface, the status LED should light up.
User Setting 7 (Press AVO and Softkey C) must be set to “G-Tablet” to
enable the tablet. If the tablet does not respond, change the setting of
User Setting 7 a few times until it comes back to “G-Tablet”.
9.1.2
Using the tablet
To use the tablet, press the pen onto it (the button on the side of the
pen doesn’t do anything). A quick press is like pushing a button on the
Pearl. You can also draw on the tablet by keeping the pen pressed
down while moving it. This is used to move fixtures or change
attributes.
The tablet has a paper overlay on it, with printed pads which simulate
buttons or other controls. You can write your fixture names, group
names, attributes, palette entries and even draw your stage layout on
the overlay so that you know what’s what. Spare overlays are available
from Avolites.
The Pearl will behave as if you are pressing buttons on it in the normal
way, so the LEDs and the display will change as you use the tablet.
Many of the functions of the Pearl are quicker and easier using the
tablet. Sometimes you might find it easier to do part of the function on
the tablet and part on the console. The end result is the same.
9.1.3
Selecting fixtures on the tablet
To select a fixture, press the pen onto one of the “Fixtures” pads
marked on the tablet overlay. You will see the fixture Swop button on
the Pearl light up as if you’d
Fixture select pads
pressed it. The first 60 fixtures
which are patched are available
on the tablet.
You can select a group in a
similar way. Press the pen onto
one of the Group pads marked
on the overlay. You will see all
the fixtures in the group recalled
on the Pearl. Only the first 30
groups are available on the
tablet.
9.1.4
Changing the position of the fixtures
You can control the position of the selected fixture by drawing on the
Stage area of the tablet. The selected fixtures will move to the pan-tilt
position specified by the pen on the tablet. You can move the fixtures
to a particular position just by touching the pen to a particular place on
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
9. The graphics tablet - Page 181
the tablet Stage area.
If you press the pen on the Nudge pad, the tablet will go into Nudge
mode. Now when you draw on the Stage area of the tablet, all selected
fixtures will move relative to their current positions. This can be useful
if you want to slightly reposition a fixture or a group of fixtures. Press
the pen on the Absolute pad to turn off this mode.
The top right corner of the VDU shows A for Absolute or N for Nudge.
If you have trained the Pearl, which is described on page 131, you can
turn on Tracking mode by pressing the pen on the Track ON pad. When
you press the pen on the stage area of the tablet, all the lights will
point at the same place on the stage. If you draw the stage layout on
the tablet overlay, you can instantly focus the fixtures on a specific
point on the stage just by pressing the pen on the tablet.
9.1.5
Changing colours and other attributes
If the fixture can do colour mixing, you can set the colour by drawing in
the colour control area of the tablet. There is a colour Nudge pad which
allows you to change the colour slightly as for positions. The colour
Absolute pad lets you set up a new colour. The Luminosity bar sets the
brightness of the colour.
You can change individual attributes of selected fixtures by pressing the
pen on to one of the attribute pads, then (without lifting the pen)
drawing up and down on the tablet.
You can also use the fader bar to change attributes, press the pen on
the attribute pad you want to change then draw up and down on the
fader bar.
Press the pen on the Dimmer pad above the fader bar to allocate it to
the dimmer attribute.
There is an Align pad and a Flip pad which allow instant access to the
functions on the console (see page 128).
9.1.6
Recalling palette entries (focuses)
You can recall palettes 1-60 by pressing the pen onto one of the
Focuses pads.
9.1.7
Storing palette entries (focuses)
You can store palette entries from the graphics tablet. The tablet refers
to these as Focuses, which is what they were called in earlier Avolites
consoles.
The buttons above the stage area allow you to edit and save position
palettes. Press the pen on the Recall Focus pad, then press the pen on
a focus pad to select all the fixtures in that palette entry and set the
values. You can move all the fixtures together, or the Step to Next and
Step to Last pads on the tablet will step through the fixtures one at a
time. When you have made the changes, press the pen on the Store
Pan/Tilt pad to store the changes back into the same palette entry.
You can also change other attributes in a palette, but to store changes
other than pan/tilt you use the Store Focus pad on the right hand side
of the tablet.
9.1.8
Programming functions on the tablet
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 182 - 9. The graphics tablet
The tablet has a selection of other function pads down the right hand
side, including Locate Fixture, Flip, Select All, Clear (programmer), Off,
Record Memory etc. These have the same functions as pressing the
appropriate button on the Pearl.
You can create a group using the tablet, just select the fixtures you
want in the group, press the pen on the Record Group pad, then on the
group pad where you want to save the group.
The Release Fixture pad is similar to clear, but it only removes from the
programmer fixtures which are selected.
The DeLatch Fixtures pad deselects a fixture but leaves any changes in
the programmer.
The F4 and F5 pads provide special functions on fixtures which have
been trained for Tracking:
•
The F4 pad moves positioning between selected fixtures. On each
press of the pen on this pad, all selected fixtures will take on the
position of the next fixture. For example if 3 fixtures are selected,
then fixture 1 will move to the XY position of fixture 2, 2 to 3 and
3 to 1.
•
The F5 pad provides circle open-close movement on a range of
fixtures. If the pen is placed on this pad and moved in a forward
direction, the spot cast on the stage by the selected fixtures, will
move outwards from a centre point. The centre point is the
average XY position of the spots. For example, if the spots are
arranged in a circle then the circle will expand. If the pen is moved
downwards then the spots will move towards and through the
centre point. In the example of the circle, the circle will shrink,
cross through the centre and expand in the opposite direction.
The arrow pads simulate the cursor arrow buttons on the console.
Other pads in this area, and the Mouse Pad area above, are for future
expansion.
9.1.9
Tablet status on the VDU monitor
In the top right hand corner of the VDU monitor are 3 letters, T A and
N, which mean the following when they are lit up:
T: Tracking mode is enabled
A: Absolute position mode is enabled
N: Nudge mode is enabled
9.2
Advanced options
9.2.1
Extending the tablet cable
You can extend the tablet cable either with a 25-pin D straight through
cable, or an RJ45 extension cable if the tablet is fitted with an RJ45
connector.
An Avolites Riggers Remote cable can be used if modified so that pin 25
is connected straight through.
An RJ45 extension cable must be connected straight through with an
RJ45 plug on one end and an RJ45 trailing socket on the other end.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
10. Running the show - Page 183
C H A P T E R
T E N
10. Running the show
This chapter contains: Run modes, channel mimics, master faders,
manual control during a show
10.1
Playback
10.1.1 Run modes
When you finish programming, back up the console to disk before you
start the show (see page 197). Then turn the key to Run mode to make
sure you can’t accidentally change anything.
When you are running a show, there are two modes available to you,
normal Run mode, where you can turn on anything you have
programmed but can’t control anything manually, and Takeover run
mode which allows you to take manual control if you want. The mode
also affects how the Swop and Flash buttons on the console operate.
There is also “2 preset mode” which you have to enable in the User
Settings menu, see section 10.2.
You can select the mode by pressing A [Toggle mode]. The mode is
shown on the top line of the display.
•
Normal Run mode: the Flash and Swop buttons on the handles
and playbacks work as flash buttons. The “Flash” button adds the
function into anything else which is on. The “Swop” button turns
on the function, but turns off everything else while the button is
held down. The programmer is cleared and you can’t manually
control any LTP channels. You can control HTP channels using the
preset faders.
•
Takeover run mode: the Swop buttons on the handles allow you
to select dimmers or fixtures for manual control. This lets you add
to or change your programming in real time during the show. The
Flash buttons on the handles recall palette values (but unless you
are used to the Pearl, it is easier to use the dedicated Palette
buttons). The faders still control the intensity of the dimmers and
fixtures. The Flash and Swop buttons on the playbacks are
disabled.
10.1.2 Master faders
In the bottom left hand corner of the console are the Master Faders.
These allow overall intensity control of the whole console.
•
The Add/Flash and Swop masters control the intensity of the Flash and
Swop buttons on the playbacks. This allows you to flash the playbacks
to a certain level. It also allows you to disable the Flash buttons by
setting the master at 0. (If you turn the Swop master to 0 you will get
a blackout if you press a Swop button).
•
The Preset Master controls the overall intensity of any channels turned
on in the Preset faders.
•
The Grand Master controls the intensity of all output from the console.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 184 - 10. Running the show
Normally you would set this at full, and use it if you need to quickly
fade out all the lights.
Tiger: The Pearl Tiger does not have an Add/Flash Master.
10.1.3 Manual control during a show (“Busking”)
If you have not had as much programming time as you would have
liked, you might need to make up some additional effects during the
show. Fortunately the Pearl is designed with this in mind and there are
lots of features to spice up your life. You need to be in Takeover Run
mode to do this stuff.
Instant palettes: Select some fixtures, press Focus, then select a
palette option from the softkeys (or press a grey Flash/Palette button).
When you recall a palette value instantly, it gets placed in the
programmer. This means that the palette will override any memories
you later turn on, until you press “Clear”.
Fading palettes: You can “fade” to a palette value by selecting the
fixtures you want to change, typing the fade time (e.g. “2” for 2
seconds), pressing Focus, then using the softkey menus to recall the
Palette you want (e.g. Green). The selected fixtures will change to
Green over a 2 second period. If you fade to a palette value, the palette
does not go into the programmer. This means that when you turn on a
new memory, the fixtures will change to the new memory rather than
being overridden by the palette.
Palette master time: You can set a Master Time option in the Palette
Options so that all palettes will fade without you having to type in a
time. Press Focus, then G [Options], then A [Master Time]. Type a new
time and press Enter. If you want instant palettes that don’t get put in
the programmer, you can set the master time to 0.1 seconds.
Changing all fixtures in a memory: You can apply a “quick palette”
to all the fixtures in a memory (without having to select the fixtures) by
pressing Focus, holding down the softkey for the palette you want, then
pressing the Swop button of the memory. If you type a number after
pressing Focus, the palette values will fade over the time you typed.
This palette is not placed in the programmer, so the next LTP changes
will overwrite it. (User Settings option 6 must be turned on for this to
work)
Nudge mode: You can also change the position of fixtures; the easiest
way to do this is to use “Nudge” mode on the graphics tablet. This
allows you to sweep selected fixtures around their programmed position
by drawing with the pen, so you can alter the height of a chase or
shape in real time.
Tracking: If you have trained the desk for Tracking, you can (with
practice!) follow someone on the stage or move fixtures to point to a
soloist.
Manual control: You can control any attribute of a fixture manually
exactly like when you were programming. This requires care to look
good; using the preset palettes is usually a better bet.
You cannot add new shapes in Run mode. You need to have some
shapes saved in memories which you can then turn on.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
10. Running the show - Page 185
10.2
Options
10.2.1 Two-preset mode
You can use the top and bottom preset faders to control dimmers
patched on the 1-30 faders in a standard “two preset” mode, using the
A and B Masters as preset masters. In this mode, fader 31 controls the
same dimmer as fader 1, fader 32 controls the same as fader 2, and so
on. This allows you to set up two different lighting states and fade
between them using the A and B masters, as you would on a basic
lighting desk.
To enable Two preset mode, set User Setting 1 to “2-preset”. (Hold
AVO and press Softkey C to get the user settings).
In this mode, anything patched to the top faders 31-60 is not
accessible using the faders, however programmed memories and
chases will play back as if in Normal Run mode. The Playback Master
fader is used as the B Master in this mode and does not control
Playback level. All playbacks will run at full level.
Tiger: 2-preset mode cannot be used on the Pearl Tiger.
10.2.2 Temporarily locking the console
You can temporarily lock the console by typing a 4 digit code then
pressing C [Lock Desk], then Enter. All the controls on the panel will be
disabled. Enter the code again to unlock the console.
This is useful to prevent passers-by or sound engineers tampering with
the console if you need to leave it unattended; it is not secure as you
can simply reset or re-power the console to remove the lock.
10.2.3 Channel mimics
If you are in normal Run mode, the LEDs on each handle mimic the
intensity of the fixture or dimmer controlled by that handle (i.e. they
are lit if it is turned on).
If you are in Takeover Run mode (or Program mode), you can choose
between “Mimic” mode, or “Fixture” mode where the LEDs show you
which fixtures are selected for manual control.
You select the mode by holding down the Avo button and pressing
Softkey A. The button shows “Preset LEDs = Fixtures” (or mimics)
depending on the mode. You can also change this mode using the
Graphics Tablet.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 186 - 10. Running the show
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
11. Automated playback (script files) - Page 187
C H A P T E R
E L E V E N
11. Automated playback (script files)
This chapter contains: Script files, using script files in Run mode.
Script files are a powerful feature of the Pearl which allow you to record
a show in real time using the playback faders, then play back the show
automatically, synchronised to an external MIDI time code source, or
using the Pearl’s internal clock. This is very useful for repeated light
shows such as at exhibitions or in fixed displays.
The script file is simply a list of instructions to the Pearl which specify
actions at certain times. The easiest way to make a script file is to get
the Pearl to record your actions as you do them, but you can also enter
commands individually.
11.1
Create
11.1.1 Recording Script files
Before you can create your script file, you need to program all the
memories and chases you want to use.
To enter script file programming mode, turn the key to “System”, then
press D [Script file programming].
The procedure for programming a script file is as follows:
1>
Press A [Select timer source], then A [External timecode] (MIDI)
or D [Internal timer].
2>
Press B [Record script file]. Start the timecode source if using
MIDI. If using the internal timer, press A [Select timer source]
then F [Start timer] to start it.
3>
Run the show as you want it by turning playbacks on and off. The
Pearl records your actions (including fade times) as script file
commands. You must move faders to maximum for the action to
be recorded.
4>
Press F [Done] when finished.
•
By default the Pearl will record Script File 1. You can change this
using option C [Select script file].
•
Press D [Reset Timer] to set the timer back to zero. You can use
this if you want the recording to start at zero; otherwise the timer
runs before you are ready to start recording.
•
You can use Time of Day as timecode by pressing C [Clock
Timecode] from the select timer source menu. When recording for
Time of Day playback, it’s easiest to use Internal timer and set the
internal timer to the real time you want to be recorded.
•
At any point, pressing the ML Menu button will reset any
playbacks which have been turned on by the script file and move
the file back to the first step.
•
Option E [Clear masters] will turn off any playbacks used by the
script file.
•
Ensure the master faders are at full when recording Script files
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 188 - 11. Automated playback (script files)
otherwise the playback faders will not be recorded.
11.1.2 What is recorded in the script file
The script file records two types of action:
When a playback fader is raised, the script file records
• The playback number, roller segment and roller page number
• The timecode setting when the fader starts to move
• The time taken for the playback fader to move from the trigger
point to full.
When a playback fader is lowered, the script file records
• The playback number
• The timecode setting when the fader starts to move
• The time taken for the playback fader to move from full to the
trigger point.
11.2
Playback
You can play back script files either from script file programming mode
(with the key set to System), or from Run mode. Normally you will test
the script file runs correctly after you’ve programmed it, but then
switch to Run mode to actually use it.
11.2.1 Selecting a script file for testing
The Pearl can play and record script files numbered 1 to 99.
1>
If you are not in Script File Programming mode, turn the key to
System and press D [Script file programming].
2>
From the script file menu press C [Select script file].
3>
Type the script file number on the numeric keypad, or use the up
and down arrows to highlight the script file you want on the
screen.
4>
Press Enter.
This will load the script file, but will not run it yet.
•
Press F [Next Step] to select the current step in the file. The timer
will change to match the timecode of the step.
•
Press ML Menu to make step 1 the active step, and turn off any
playbacks used by the script file.
11.2.2 Testing the script file
It’s easiest to use the internal clock to test the script file, though you
can also restart your external timecode source if you are using one. The
internal clock produces the same type of timecode as the external
(MIDI) timecode.
The display shows the next step to be run with an asterisk (*), and the
live step is shown below the clock as “Live=XX”.
1>
Press A [Select timer source]
2>
Press D, [Internal timer].
3>
If you are simulating an external timecode, type the start time
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
11. Automated playback (script files) - Page 189
using the keypad. Or just press Enter to set the timer to zero.
4>
Press E [Connect Timer] to run
the script file to the timecode.
5>
The timer will run and the script
file will replay.
•
You can use Time of Day as
timecode by pressing C [Clock
Timecode] from the select timer
source menu. This can be useful if
the Pearl is running time-related
lighting shows.
•
You can jump to a step by typing
the step number on the keypad
and pressing Enter. If you are
using the internal clock it will
jump to the time for that step.
•
When the script file is running,
softkey E becomes [Disconnect
Timer], which will stop the file
running. Softkey F becomes [Synchronise] which will synchronise
the script file to the current timer, skipping steps if necessary.
11.2.3 Using Script files in Run mode
When the Pearl is in Run mode, a special set of Script file options are
available. You can run a script file and operate the console manually at
the same time.
First you need to set the options for the script file.
D [Script file Functions] - Sets options for how the script file is run.
The menu options are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
A [Select timer source] - Selects external or internal timecode and
starts or stops the internal timer (same as option A on the main
Script File menu)
C [Select script file] - Allows a script file to be selected (same as
option C on the main Script File menu)
D [Start from Step 1] - Resets the file to step 1, also resets the
internal timer, if you are using it, to the Step 1 time.
E [Connect timer] - Runs the script file. (Same as option E on the
main Script File menu). This option changes to [Disconnect timer]
when the script file is connected.
F [Next Step] - Moves the script file on to the next step, and
outputs the step. Also moves the internal timer on to the time for
the next step. This option changes to [Synchronise] when a script
file is running, which will skip any missed steps.
G [Clear Script File Playbacks]. Turns off all playbacks which have
been used by the script file.
You can also press ML Menu to release the playbacks which have
been used.
C [Play Script File] - Starts the currently selected Script file (selected
using option D). The script file runs from its current position, so you
may need to reset it to step 1 (see above). If you are using the
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 190 - 11. Automated playback (script files)
internal timer, the timer is started.
The option changes to [Pause Script file] when selected.
11.2.4 Looping and running script files on power up
The Pearl can be configured to run script files on power up, and to loop
the script file (if using internal time code). This is useful for unattended
operation in exhibitions.
In the Script file main menu, Press G [Script File parameters] to set
these options.
Select the script file you want to change using the up and down arrows.
The current script file is highlighted.
Option B [Toggle Loop mode] changes
the Loop setting of the current script
file. Loop resets the timer to zero
when the file finishes (this only works
when using the internal timer). The
display shows “Ends” or “Cont”
(continuous)
Option C [Toggle the script file
autorun] changes the Autorun setting
for the current script file. The Auto
column will show “ON” when autorun is
enabled. The Global Autorun setting,
option A, must also be enabled for
Autorun to work.
Option A [Toggle the Global Autorun]
sets the global setting which enables
or disables Autoruns. The top line of
the display shows “Global Auto=”
status.
11.3
Edit
Press D [Edit a script file].
You can edit each step of a script file to change the playback number,
the timecode value for the step, and the fade in and out time. Timecode
editing is described in the Timing section.
11.3.1 The script file edit display
The screen shows the steps in the script file. The current step is
indicated with an arrow. You can change the current step using the up
and down arrow buttons, or by typing the step number on the keypad.
As there isn’t space to describe the step on the screen, a code is used:
C 1A 12 (Chase on Roller Page 1, roller segment A, playback 12)
M 1C 10 (Memory on Roller Page 1, roller segment C, playback 10)
R 10 (Ramp down (turn off) of playback 10. Page information is not
given for ramp down steps)
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
11. Automated playback (script files) - Page 191
The VDU screen, having more space, shows more detail of the steps.
11.3.2 Editing an action
This allows you to change the playback number, or to set a “ramp
down” for a playback, or to change the fade in/out time.
Select the step to be edited using the up and down arrow keys, then
press D [Assign Action]. The options are:
A [Load]: followed by the swop button of the playback to be loaded.
Changes the step to a fade in of the playback you select.
B [Ramp Down]: followed by the swop button of the playback to turn
off. Changes the step to a fade out of the playback you select.
C [Record a blackout step]: inserts a blackout. All playbacks under
control of the script file are taken to zero.
D [Ramp Time]: sets the fade in/out time. Type the new time in
seconds on the keypad and press Enter.
E [Theatre Stack GO]: sets this step to trigger the Go button on the
theatre stack.
11.3.3 Inserting a step into the script file
Use the arrow keys to select the position for the new step.
Press B [Insert before step x] or C [Insert after step x] to insert the
new step. The new step is blank, with no action or timecode.
Use the Assign Action and Assign Timecode options to set the action
and timecode for the inserted step.
11.3.4 “On-the-fly” editing
Softkey F [On the fly editing] allows you to add new events to the file in
real time as it plays back. (You can also add events to the file while it is
paused, anything you do will be added at the current timer setting).
The options on the menu are:
A [Select timer source] - same as option A on the main menu
C [Sort steps by timecode] - same as option C on the Assign Timecode
menu
D [Play] - runs the file from the current time
E [Pause] - stops running the file
F [Start script file from step 1]
G [On the fly editing] - highlighted when this mode is active. Press to
turn off on-the-fly editing.
11.4
Timing
Press D [Edit a script file] to amend timings.
11.4.1 Editing a timecode
Select the step to be edited using the up and down arrow keys, then
press E [Assign timecode].
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 192 - 11. Automated playback (script files)
To enter a new timecode from the keypad, press C [Assign TC from
input], type in the new timecode value on the keypad and press D
[Assign TC to step from input]. Timecode is displayed and entered as
HH/MM/SS.FF (hours, minutes, seconds, frames – frames are 1/25th of
a second). The top line of the display shows you the timecode you are
entering.
Alternatively, press D [Assign TC to step] to use the current timecode
setting.
11.4.2 Changing timecode for a group of steps
If you want to offset the timing of a number of consecutive steps, you
can allocate them to a group and change the start time of the group.
The grouped steps will keep their timings relative to each other, but will
all be offset.
You define the group like this:
1>
Press E [Assign Timecode]
2>
Use the up and down arrows to select the step to add to the group
3>
Press F [Toggle group] to add the step to the group. An arrow “<”
will appear next to the step.
4>
Repeat from 2 to add other steps to the group
•
All consecutive steps marked “<” are now part of a group.
•
Also, other consecutive steps you haven’t marked automatically
become a different group. For example, if you’ve got a file with 30
steps and you mark steps 1-10 as a group, steps 11-30 will
become another group.
A new timecode is assigned to the group like this:
1>
Use the up and down arrows to select a step in the group
2>
Press E [Assign TC from input], type the timecode where you
want the first step in the group to run, and press C [Assign TC to
group from input].
3>
Alternatively press C [Assign TC to group] to use the current
timecode setting.
4>
All steps in the group will be offset to the new time, but will keep
their relative timings.
You can also press A [Select a timer source] to select current timecode
to be taken from external or internal clocks.
11.4.3 Changing the start timecode for the whole script file
In the Assign Timecode menu, Softkey B [Assign TC to file start] will
set the current timecode as the new start time for the whole file. All
steps in the script file will keep their relative timings. You can use this
command with the timer stopped or running
To enter a start timecode on the keypad, press E [Assign TC from
input], type in the timecode, then press B [Assign TC to File Start from
input].
11.4.4 Sorting the steps into time order
When you have edited steps, the display may show the steps in the
wrong order. Press E [Assign Timecode] then G [Sort by timecode] to
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
11. Automated playback (script files) - Page 193
re-order the display into the correct order. The functioning of the script
file is not affected.
11.5
Copy
11.5.1 Copying a script file
Press G [Script file parameters].
Select the script file to be copied using the up and down arrow keys.
The current script file is highlighted.
Press the blue Photocopy button.
Type in a number for the newly copied script file.
Press Enter to confirm or exit to cancel.
11.6
Delete
11.6.1 Deleting a step
Press D [Edit a script file].
Select the step to be deleted using the up and down arrow keys, then
press A [Delete Step].
Press F [Yes] to confirm.
11.6.2 Deleting a script file
Press G [Script file parameters].
Select the script file to be deleted using the up and down arrow keys.
The current script file is highlighted.
Press the blue Delete button.
Press Enter to confirm or exit to cancel.
11.7
Options
The options on the Script File Menu are:
A [Select timer source] - Allows you to select the source for the
timer on which the script file is based. The possibilities are:
•
•
•
•
•
A - External (MIDI) time code.
C - Clock Timecode - uses the Time of Day as the clock
D - Internal timer /TC - uses the internal clock
E - Stop timer - stops the internal clock
F - Start timer - restarts the internal clock
You can enter a setting for the internal clock using the numeric
keypad - 2 digits each for hours, minutes, seconds, frames - then
press Enter. The time you are entering is shown at the bottom of
the screen.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 194 - 11. Automated playback (script files)
To reset the internal timer to 0, just press Enter.
B [Record script file] - This option lets you create a new script file as
described in section 11.1.1. If there is already a script file, the
Pearl will check you want to overwrite it (if not, select No and use
option C below to work on another file).
C [Select script file] - Lets you select which script file you want to
work on. The display shows a list of script files. Type the number
of the one you want using the numeric keypad, from 01-99, then
press Enter. To start with a new blank file, select any number
which is not on the list.
D [Edit script file] - Allows you to edit the current file, described in
detail in the Edit section on page 190.
E [Connect Timer] - Connects the timer to the script file. This will
cause steps to be executed when the event timecode matches the
timer. The option changes to Disconnect timer when selected, and
option F changes to Synchronise.
F [Next Step] - Moves on to the next step in the script file. The timer
is set to match the time of the step and the step is output. This
option changes to Synchronise when the timer is connected to the
script file; this allows the file to “catch up” with the timer by
skipping events.
G [Script File parameters] - Lets you set options for how the script
file is run. The display shows a list of the script files available, you
can select the current file using the cursor arrows or by entering
the script file number on the keypad. The menu options are:
•
•
•
•
•
A [Toggle the Global Autorun] - Enables Autorun, any file with
Autorun turned on using option C will run when the Pearl is
turned on
B [Toggle Loop mode] - Changes the Loop setting of the
current script file. Loop resets the timer to zero when the file
finishes. Only works with the internal timer.
C [Toggle the script file autorun] - Changes the Autorun
setting for the current script file. Global Autorun must also be
On. The Auto column will show “ON” when autorun is
enabled.
D [Set end-time from input] - Allows you to set the end-time
of the file from the numeric keypad
E [Set end-time from script] - Sets the end-time to the last
event in the file.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
12. Setup - Page 195
C H A P T E R
T W E L V E
12. Setup
This chapter contains: The user settings menu; Wipe modes; Disk
functions
The Pearl is very easy to customise to your preferred way of working.
The main options are contained in the “User settings menu”.
12.1
User Settings
12.1.1 The User Settings menu
This menu is obtained by holding down the AVO button and pressing C
[User Settings]. You can also turn the key to System mode and press C
[User Settings].
You select the option to change using the cursor up/down buttons, and
make the changes using the left/right buttons.
The options are:
1. Normal Run / Take Over - Sets the Run mode of the Pearl. This
option can also be set by pressing Softkey A while in Run mode.
See page 183 for details of Run mode.
2. Rec by Fixture / Rec by channel - Sets the recording mode of the
Pearl. If set to “by Fixture”, if any attributes of a fixture are
changed, all attributes are recorded. If set to “by channel”, only
changed attributes are recorded. See page 147 for details of how
this works. This option can also be set by holding the Avo button
and pressing Softkey B.
3. Speed=Seconds / BPM - Allows you to set whether chase speed is
displayed in Seconds or Beats Per Minute (tempo).
4. Autoconnect Yes / No - Allows you to turn Chase autoconnect on
or off. If on, the controls are automatically connected to the most
recently turned on chase. If off, you have to connect the chase
manually using the Connect button.
5. Palette page Off / On - When set to on, 30 different palettes are
available from the flash buttons on each fixture page (1-30 on
Page 0--, 31-60 on Page 1--, 61-90 on Page 2-- and 91-120 on
Page 3--). When set to Off, palettes 1-30 are on the flash buttons
for all fixture pages.
6. Q palette Off / On - Enables the quick palette function which allows
you to apply a palette to all fixtures if no fixtures are selected
7. G-Tablet / Remote Control / DSR-20 Remote - Specifies what
device is connected to the serial port
8. DMX Chans = xxx - Sets the maximum number of DMX channels to
transmit. If your rig does not use all 512 channels, you can
improve the DMX refresh rate by reducing this number to the
maximum of your rig.
9. Fader ON > x (vv) - Sets the level of the fader at which LTP
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 196 - 12. Setup
channels turn on when fading in a memory or chase. X is the
percentage value, vv is the raw DMX value
10. Fader OFF < x (vv) - Sets the level of the fader at which LTP
channels turn off when fading out a memory or chase. This has to
be at least 2 values below the “on” value. The Pearl will not let you
set an incorrect value.
11. Grand Master OK / Broken - Allows you to disable (fix at full) the
Grand Master fader should it happen to get broken by oiks being
careless with the desk case lid.
12. TC Check On / Off – Turns MIDI timecode checking on or off. If
turned on, the Pearl will sample the incoming timecode, and if it is
corrupted will substitute internal timecode until the external
timecode is OK again.
13. xxx mcS - Sets the DMX idle time (the delay between the end of
one packet and the start of the next). This allows you to slow
down the DMX refresh rate if you have some equipment that can’t
keep up. Increasing the delay will degrade the performance of the
DMX link so you should not change this unless you have to. The
figure in brackets shows the DMX refresh rate in milliseconds.
14. Midi - SLAVE/MASTER/DISABLED/Visualiser - Sets the MIDI
mode of the Pearl. In Slave mode it receives data, in Master mode
it transmits data when you press a key or raise a fader. This
provides a simple way of recording a show straight into a
sequencer. The Visualiser setting enables communication with the
PC Visualiser system. The operation of the console will slow down
while Visualiser is enabled.
15. Midi channel = xx - Sets the MIDI transmit / receive channel.
MIDI channels are actually numbered 1-16, and the Pearl displays
0-15, so add 1 to the Pearl display to get the actual channel.
16. Use 720K / 1.4Mb disks – Sets which type of disk the Pearl
expects. The Pearl uses this setting to work out if your show will
fit on a single disk, or if it needs to span multiple disks.
There are also options on the softkeys, these are:
A [Fixtures or Mimics] – The Swop button LEDs can show either the
fixture intensity (Mimic) or light up if the fixture is selected
(Fixtures). This option can also be set by holding the Avo button
and pressing Softkey A
B [Set TC valid range] – Allows you to set the MIDI timecode range
which will be accepted. Enter the minimum time as prompted on
the screen and press softkey A, or the maximum time and press
softkey B.
C [Specify Attributes for Bank] - Allows you to set which attributes
go together (also called the Focus Mask, see page 138 for another
way of setting this). Normally the Dimmer attribute includes all
the others, and the Colour attribute includes the
cyan/magenta/yellow attributes, but you can change this. Select
the Attribute to change, then press this option. Select the other
attributes you want to include, then press Exit. Beware of
changing these settings unless you are sure what you are doing.
G [Default settings] - sets all settings back to the defaults.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
12. Setup - Page 197
12.1.2 Setting the Wheel acceleration
The control wheels allow you to set 16-bit control values to the fixtures,
and have an acceleration function so you don’t have to spin the wheel
for hours if you need to make large changes to the fixtures.
Hold down the AVO button and press the 2 button to set the different
wheel acceleration curves. The current curve is shown on the main part
of the screen. “Linear Fast” has the fastest response and “Linear Slow”
the slowest and most accurate.
12.2
User functions
12.2.1 The Wipe menu
This menu is obtained by turning the key to System mode and then
pressing A [Service]. Softkey F [Wipe] then selects the Wipe menu.
You can selectively wipe various parts of the console, or you can wipe
the whole thing. Press softkeys B, C and D to turn the wipe options on
and off. The option is highlighted when that wipe option is turned on.
The options are:
A [Cancel] - quits Wipe mode
B [Patch] - Sets the Patching to be wiped. The programming and
individual Palettes will also be wiped (as they would mean nothing
without the patch), however shared palettes (see page 135) will
remain.
C [Palettes]- Sets the Palettes (including shared palettes) to be wiped.
D [Programming] - Sets the memories, chases and theatre stack to
be erased. The Patch and palettes (shared and individual) will remain.
F [Wipeall] - Will wipe the whole memory, setting the console back to
factory default state. The settings of the B, C and D options are
ignored.
G [OK] - Will wipe the memory as set by options B, C and D.
12.2.2 Disk functions
The Pearl allows shows to be stored on and retrieved from USB drives.
It also has an internal USB drive which can be used to save shows, as
well as being used to store personalities. The Pearl 2008 also has a
floppy disk drive allowing shows to be transferred between Pearl 2008
consoles and other consoles in the Pearl range. The Pearl Tiger does not
have a floppy disk drive.
Press the Disk button to display the disk menu. The options are:
A [Load show from disk] – Loads a show from a storage device. The
Pearl displays a list of connected drives including the internal USB
drive. Select the drive on which your show is saved.
For USB drives, the LCD will display a list of stored show names
which can be selected by pressing the softkey next to it. The LCD
will now display a list of all available saved versions of your show
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 198 - 12. Setup
arranged in date order. Press the relevant softkey to load it or
Exit to cancel.
If using the floppy drive (not fitted on Pearl Tiger), the Pearl
displays the name of the show on the disk. This is shown on the
VDU screen only. Press Enter to load it or Exit to cancel.
B [Save show to disk] - Saves the contents of the console to disk.
Type a name for the show, then press Enter (you can use the 130 Flash and Swop buttons to enter letters if you don’t have a
QWERTY keyboard connected). The Pearl will ask if you want to
make the show compatible with Sep 2000 software. Press softkey
B for No or A for Yes (Sound to light options will be lost if you
select Yes). You will now be presented with a list of connected
drives including the internal USB drive. Select from the list where
you wish to store your show.
If saving to a USB drive, no show data will be overwritten.
Instead, a timestamped new version of your show will be saved,
allowing you to save multiple copies of your show at different
times. Each of these shows can be reloaded at a later date by
selecting the time you saved a particular version.
If saving to a floppy disk, any Pearl show data already on the disk
will be overwritten.
C [Verify disk] – Compares the show on the disk to the contents of
the Pearl.
D [Format options] - Allows you to format a disk to 720K or 1.44M,
then optionally save a show when the format is complete. This is
also a handy way to wipe a disk if you don’t have a blank disk
with you.
E [Catalogue] – Displays (on the VDU screen) the show file on the
floppy disk.
F [Import Chase] – You can import a matrix chase created on an
external PC application using this feature. To import a chase,
insert the disk containing the chase you wish to import and select
this option.
G [Load visualiser CSV file] – You can load a CSV file from Avolites
Visualiser which contains the patch information from the
Visualiser setup, which will patch the console to match the
Visualiser.
12.2.3 USB drive troubleshooting
If the desk freezes while accessing the memory stick then it could be
that there is no room left on the drive. Try turning the desk off then
back on, then delete some shows from the drive. If there are large files
on the drive from other applications then you will need to use a
computer to remove them before the Pearl can access the drive. If the
desk won’t start up and the 4 digit display on the internal motherboard
displays ‘HPIS’ then there has been a problem accessing the USB
memory stick. Try unplugging any USB drives and restarting the desk.
Some USB Drives have built in encryption software to protect their
contents. This software usually works only on Windows, and can
prevent the Pearl from accessing the drive. Usually utility software
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
12. Setup - Page 199
provided with the USB drive will allow you to disable it, so that the
drive can be used like a normal USB Drive.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 200 - 12. Setup
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
13. Other features - Page 201
C H A P T E R
T H I R T E E N
13. Other features
This chapter contains:Setting the Pearl’s clock & other utility functions;
using MIDI commands with the Pearl; Service mode; hardware
WIPEALL mode.
13.1
System Configuration
13.1.1 Utility menu
The Utility menu is accessed by turning the key to System, then
pressing G [Utilities].
A [Set clock] - The Pearl has a built-in real time clock. It uses this to
record snapshot times and disk backups, so it’s important to have
the correct time and date set on it.
To set the clock you need to be in System mode, and you need to
have a VDU screen connected.
Press A [Set Clock]. The Pearl displays a window on the VDU
screen in which you can enter the time, date and daylight saving
modes (if the clocks get put forward an hour in summer). Press
Exit to abandon or Enter to save.
C [Configure a MIDI keyboard] - Lets you change which MIDI note
turns on each memory. Send the MIDI note for memory 1, then
the note for memory 2, and so on. A prompt is displayed on the
VDU screen which tells you what the Pearl is expecting you to do.
Press Exit to end.
E [Load shape file] - Allows you to load a new shape definition file
SG.DAT. You may need to do this if Avolites issue an updated
shape file.
F [Clear Wrap around channels] - If you load a show saved with an
earlier version of software, you might get a problem with
channels which wrap around from 255 to 0. Running this option
will sort them out.
G [Update personality] - Allows you to load an updated version of
the personality file for the fixtures you currently have patched.
This is useful if Avolites release an updated version of the
personality, for example adding Range Tables. The softkeys
display a list of the fixtures you have patched.
13.1.2 USB Stick Options
The Pearl is supplied with an internal USB drive (named AVOCACH by
default), and a socket for connecting an external USB memory stick.
These USB drives allow you to save multiple copies of your shows (see
section 12.2.2 for disk functions) and also allows you store a much
larger number of personality files directly on the console than was
previously possible.
The ‘USB Stick Options’ menu, which is accessed from the System
menu, has a number of housekeeping utilities. You can take backups of
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 202 - 13. Other features
data, delete individual shows, wipe all the personality data, wipe all the
data from a USB drive, or synchronise fixture personality data. All
these operations can be performed on either the internal drive or an
external memory stick.
A [Backup] - Allows you to back up all the data on a drive. You can
back it up to either another directory on the same drive, or a
different drive. All shows and personality data is backed up. You
will first be asked to select the drive which you want to back up.
Then select which drive you want to save to. The desk will warn
you that it is about to destroy the existing backup. Press
<ENTER> and the desk will then copy the relevant files. If the
source drive contains a full personality library and many shows
this could take a long time (at least 50 minutes).
B [Restore] – Allows you to restore show data from a previous
backup. Select which drive contains the backup, and which drive
needs restoring (probably ‘AVOCACH’). All data currently stored
on the drive will be wiped, and replaced by the data from the
backup. This is designed for hire companies who wish to remove
any extraneous data and strange personalities left behind by the
hirers. They can create a clean AVOCACH with the latest
personalities, back it up then restore that backup onto the desk
every time it passes through the warehouse.
C [Wipe] – Allows show data to be wiped from a particular USB drive.
You will first be prompted to select the drive you wish to remove
show data from. This will delete all current personalities, shapes
and shows. Any backups on the drive will remain, but backing up
the newly wiped drive to itself will remove the backup.
D [Delete Show] – Used for removing all copies of a particular show.
This option may well be useful if you are running out of room on
a particular USB drive. First select the USB drive which you wish
to delete shows from. You will be presented with a list of shows
currently on that device. Select the show you wish to delete and
then press Enter to confirm or Exit to cancel. All copies of the
selected show name will be deleted from the USB drive.
E [Sync Fixtures] – Used for updating the personality library stored
on a particular USB drive. This feature will most likely be used
for adding personalities to the internal drive that you have
downloaded from our website, so they can be used whenever you
wish to patch. On entering this menu you will be presented with
a list of attached USB drives and prompted to select the drive you
wish to update. Personalities will immediately start being copied
to this drive. This “sync” process will add any personality files
not already present on the drive you select. If the personality
already exists, it will be replaced by the version on the drive you
are updating from
F [Wipe Fixtures] – This feature will delete all personalities stored on
a particular USB drive. Select the drive you wish to delete the
personalities from. Then press Enter to confirm or Exit to cancel.
How the Pearl stores show and personality data
The Pearl keeps all its data in 2 directories situated in the root directory
of the drive. ‘AVOLITES’ is used to store all the current data, while
‘AVOBKUP’ stores backups. Thus ‘C – Wipe’ deletes only the
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
13. Other features - Page 203
‘AVOLITES’ directory, while ‘F – Wipe Fixtures’ deletes
‘AVOLITES/FIXTURES’. If you wish to keep other files on your memory
stick you should keep them out of these two directories, that way the
desk will never touch them, even if you do a ‘F – Wipe’. The directory
structure is the same on ‘AVOCACH’ as it is on any external drives.
13.1.3 Service mode
Service mode, selected by turning the key to “System” then pressing A
[Service], lets you make fundamental changes to the console, including
changing the operating software.
Do make sure you have plenty of time to complete these operations. Do
not attempt to upgrade the operating system or make other
fundamental changes just before showtime!
A [Run AVOS2] - AVOS2 is the low-level operating system of the
console. While AVOS2 is running, you can update the main
operating software in the console. See next section for AVOS2
functions.
B [Diagnostic Screen] - Displays a diagnostic screen which enables
you to test the buttons, faders and wheels on the console. Press
the Up arrow or turn the key back to Run mode to get out of
Diagnostic mode.
The top line of the display shows the Master Fader levels.
Below that are the settings of the Playback Swop buttons, Flash
buttons and faders.
Below that are the preset fader flash/swop buttons and the fader
levels themselves.
Whl1 and Whl2 give an incremental count from the wheels.
Timer and DMX show a count of internal timer ticks and DMX
packets sent.
DOM_resets indicates if resets of the DMX Output Module have
occurred; this is normally caused by the TMS micro becoming
loose in its socket. Try pushing it back into the socket.
Key shows key press and release codes for the buttons. X and Y
show graphics tablet pen coordinates.
XTAL=Good shows if the MIDI oscillator is running. On early
motherboards a modification was required.
C [Display Bus Errors] - A Bus error is generated when either the
software or hardware malfunctions. Up to 20 bus errors are
logged. Press ENTER while viewing the Bus errors to clear the list.
The Bus error Type and the Program counter value at the time of
the Bus Error are stored in the log. Should the Bus error have
been caused by a Software fault, then this information can be
used the pinpoint the precise location of the fault.
If a bus error has been logged then the letter 'E' appears on the
main LCD display positioned somewhere to the top left of the
Chase Window.
Most Bus errors are caused by a faulty or incorrectly inserted VDU
card. As a general rule, if a Bus error occurs, check that all the
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 204 - 13. Other features
Chips on the Borris motherboard are properly seated.
The correct procedure to follow after a Bus error has occurred is
to send the bus error log to softwareteam@avolites.com together
with a brief description of events just before the Bus error and if
possible the show files and the key log (see D [Tests]
E [View
Key History]
D [Tests] - Displays another menu allowing you to test various
hardware in the system.
B [Read FIX.SYS] allows a user dimmer curve to be loaded
C [Modify memory] for Avolites tech support use only
D [Memory Check] runs a test on the system memory
E [View Key History] shows a list of keypresses on the VDU
screen. (Press E again to close the list)
F [View MIDI codes] shows incoming MIDI commands on the VDU
screen (press F again to close the window)
G [MIDI test] sends out MIDI data to test the ports
F [Wipe] - Allows you to wipe various parts of the console. This option
is described in detail on page 197.
13.1.4 AVOS2 functions
AVOS2 is the low-level operating system of the console. While AVOS2 is
running, you can update the main application software in the console.
If you have any information in the console, you should save it to disk
before running AVOS. You will need to enter a code to discourage
anyone who gets here by accident, the code is 68340.The options are:
A. Start the system - restarts the Pearl application software and returns
the console to normal.
B. Burn a new program - Loads new Pearl application software. This
procedure is described in detail in the next section.
C. Verify - checks if the application software on the disk matches the
one loaded on the Pearl.
D. Save program - saves the existing application software to disk
E. AVOS extender - lets you upgrade the AVOS system (see paragraph
below)
1. Wipeall and start system - Executes a Wipeall (clears everything)
then runs the Pearl operating system
2. Toggle the active drive – Lets you select which disk or USB drive will
be used to load the application software.
3. Re-connect the USB pens – If there is a problem reading from one of
the USB drives, this option will restart the USB hardware.
13.1.5 Upgrading earlier Pearl software to Pearl 2008 version
You can only install the Pearl 2008 software on Pearl 2008 or Pearl
Tiger consoles. Earlier consoles having a Boris3 motherboard may be
upgraded by fitting a BUM board which will then allow 2008 software to
be installed, please contact Avolites for details.
If your Pearl 2008 console has early software which does not support
USB, you will need to upgrade AVOS before installing the latest
software. If the System menu display does not say “Avolites Pearl
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
13. Other features - Page 205
2008” across the top then you need to upgrade AVOS.
The 2008 software enables the use of USB drives for storing fixture
personalities and shows. It also adds a licensing system to prevent
copyright infringements.
The upgrade happens in 3 parts. First the underlying AVOS operating
system must be upgraded and a licence key entered, then the
application software must be upgraded, and finally all the fixture
personalities will need to be copied onto the internal USB drive.
Before upgrading, you need to register your console with Avolites. On
the Avolites website, go to the download page for Pearl 2008 and click
“Obtain software license”. The license file will be emailed to you after
you have completed the registration, you should save the license file to
a USB drive for transfer to the console. It may take up to 7 working
days (normally quicker) to obtain the license, so please ensure you
have completed this step before starting the upgrade.
You will require the AVOS upgrade file on a floppy disk and a USB drive
containing the latest personality files. These can all be downloaded from
the Avolites web site.
1>
Turn the key to System.
2>
Press A [Service] then A [Run AVOS].
3>
Type the password 68340 and press Enter
4>
The Pearl will load the AVOS menu. Press E [AVOS Extender] then
Enter.
5>
Follow the instructions on the Pearl, inserting the USB drive
containing the license file and the floppy disk containing AVOS
when prompted.
6>
When prompted, press Exit, then restart the console by turning it
off and on again. The system menu should now say “Avolites Pearl
2008” at the top..
Next upgrade the application software as described below.
13.1.6 Installing the latest Pearl application software
From time to time, Avolites make updated software available on the
website. The new software may add new features and fix any problems
found with the console. The Avolites website has detailed instructions
on how to get the software from the website onto a disk for the
console.
You can load new software from disk using the following procedure.
1>
Turn the key to “System”.
2>
Press A [Service], then again A [Run AVOS2].
3>
Enter the password which is 68340 and press Enter. (This is the
number of the main processor, if you forget it you can remind
yourself by opening the console and looking at the top of the main
processor chip)
4>
Insert the disk or USB drive containing the software
5>
Use option 2 to select the correct drive from which to load the
software
6>
Press B [Burn a new program], then press Enter.
7>
Wait until “100% completed” appears, then press Exit. If the
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 206 - 13. Other features
message “Failed” appears or the system halts for a long time
before 100% is reached, the disk is probably faulty. Download the
software again onto another disk and try again.
8>
Press 1 [Wipeall and start system] followed by Enter to restart the
main program. Do not use A [Start system] as the new software
may not be compatible with the data stored internally in the
memory.
•
The show in the Pearl will be lost during the upgrade. Save the show
before upgrading, and reload it afterwards, if you want to keep it.
•
You can also enter AVOS mode by holding down the 21 and 30 Flash
buttons while powering up the Pearl.
13.1.7 Installing new fixture personalities
You can update the internal fixture personalities by downloading the
latest Pearl 2008 personality files from the Avolites website, then using
the “Sync Fixtures” option on the USB Stick Options menu. See section
13.1.2 on page 201.
Copying personalities can take a long time, up to 60 minutes. You can
patch fixtures from your external USB disk if you are short of time.
13.1.8 Troubleshooting an Invalid License
If hardware in the console is replaced or a serious hardware problem
happens, the console may display “Program panel keys not responding
due to invalid license”. At this point you have two choices, you may
start the console in unlicensed mode which will allow you to run a
previously programmed show, but not change anything, or you may
start in AVOS mode and relicense the console. (You will need the AVOS
software on disk to relicense, which you can get from the Avolites
website). Please see section 13.1.5 for details of how to license the
console.
13.1.9 Hardware WIPEALL mode
You can do a complete factory reset by fitting a link on the board. You
should obviously save any show data that you want to keep. It may
also be advisable to have a backup of the system software (AVOS
option D) before you do this… just in case.
1>
Disconnect the Pearl from the mains.
2>
Undo the half-turn fasteners on the rear edge of the console, and
lift the fader section of the console.
3>
Fit the Wipeall link. On Borris 3 motherboards this is at the
bottom right of the board near the 4-digit display. On older
motherboards it is located on the main PCB near the large square
processor. It’s labelled on the PCB legend. A link is provided fitted
to one of the pins. Fit the link so it connects the two pins.
4>
Close the console (don’t fasten it), then turn on the power.
5>
The console will power up in the AVOS menu. Select option A
“Start the System”. (do not select any other option when the
Wipeall link is fitted).
6>
Turn off the Pearl, open it and remove the Wipeall link (fit to one
of the pins only). If you forget this, the console will do a Wipeall
every time you turn it on!
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
13. Other features - Page 207
7>
Close the console and refasten it.
If you do the above then restart the console without selecting “Start
the System”, you may not be able to get the console to run. Use the
following procedure to start the console. This procedure is also another
way to get into AVOS mode.
1>
Turn off the console and open as described above.
2>
Fit the AVOS link. On Borris 3 motherboards this is in the bottom
right corner by the 4-digit display. On earlier boards it is located
near the chip labelled “PASHA”. It is in a row of 8 jumpers, the
AVOS link is the one nearest the back of the console. A link is
provided fitted to one of the pins. Fit the link so it connects the
two pins.
3>
Close the console (don’t fasten it), then turn on the power.
4>
The console will power up in the AVOS menu.
5>
Select A [Start the system]. Do not select any other option.
6>
Turn off the Pearl, open it and remove the AVOS link (fit to one of
the pins only).
7>
Close the console and refasten it.
The location of the links on the motherboards are shown on the next
page.
13.1.10 Audio gain links
You can change the sensitivity range of the audio input using the Preset
Gain Links.
The links are located near the audio connector. On the Borris 3
motherboard they are labelled L14, L15, L16. Link L16 for 0dB, L15 for
20dB and L14 for 40dB
On older motherboards they are labelled “Preset Gain Links” and the
gain for each link is printed on the board.
The link should normally be set to 0dB for speaker level, 20dB for line
level input, 40dB for a microphone level input.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 208 - 13. Other features
Audio gain links
Borris 3 motherboard
Wipeall and
AVOS links
Borris 2 motherboard
Audio gain links
AVOS link
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Wipeall link
13. Other features - Page 209
13.2
MIDI functions
The Pearl can respond to or output MIDI note information which
emulates certain buttons being pressed or faders being moved. The
console can also respond to MIDI Timecode, which is used with script
files.
If you want to know more about MIDI, a good book to read is MIDI
Systems and Control by Francis Rumsey; Published by Focal Press,
ISBN 0-240-513000-2. There’s also a huge amount of information
available on the Internet, try searching for “MIDI specification”.
The MIDI mode is set on the User Settings menu to be MIDI master
(outputs MIDI when you turn on playbacks), MIDI slave (responds to
MIDI) or MIDI disabled. The MIDI channel the Pearl will respond to is
also set on this menu (note that you need to add 1 to the number
displayed by the Pearl to get the actual MIDI channel number).
13.2.1 What a MIDI command looks like
The normal MIDI command is: STATUS BYTE1 BYTE2
Or in binary, 1cccnnnn 0xxxxxxx 0yyyyyyy
ccc
=
the MIDI command (note on, program change etc)
nnnn
menu).
=
the MIDI channel number (set on the User Settings
xxxxxxx and yyyyyyy are the data bytes.
MIDI often works in “running status” mode. If a lot of the same type of
command is being sent (lots of note on’s etc.) then the status byte can
be missed out. The receiver knows that if it doesn’t get a status byte, it
just has to run with the last one it received.
13.2.2 MIDI commands used by the Pearl
The Pearl uses standard MIDI commands. The usual name for these is
given in italics. All commands are given in hexadecimal notation ($9n),
where ‘n’ is the MIDI channel number. So a note on command for MIDI
channel 3 for example would be $92.
Set playback page : program change ($Cn xx)
Page
1
2
3
4
5
…
28
29
30
xx
$00
$01
$02
$03
$04
…
$1B
$1C
$1D
example
$Cn $02
Console changes to Page 3
Turn on a playback: note on ($9n pp ll)
Note number (pp) = playback number, from 0 - 14 (decimal)
Key velocity (ll) = playback level, from 0 - 127 (decimal). 127=Full
example $9n $03 $40
Playback Fader 4 at 50% level.
(Note that Playback Fader numbers start at zero, so subtract one from
the number on the console to get the MIDI note number).
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 210 - 13. Other features
To Turn Off a playback, send a note on command with velocity=0. The
Pearl does not recognise MIDI note off ($8n) commands.
Stop/run/step a chase etc: after touch ($An pp cc)
Note number (pp) = playback number, from 0 - 19 (decimal)
Aftertouch value (cc) = control codes:
$00
stop chase
$01
run chase
$02
restart from step 1
$03
fade to next step using programmed fade times
$04
Snap directly to next step
13.2.3 MIDI Time Code
MIDI time code is used to synchronise Script Files with an external
music track.
Quarter-frame message types are fully supported and these follow the
standard format, which can be found in most MIDI handbooks. A
suitable EBU/LTC Timecode to Midi Timecode converter is manufactured
by JC Cooper Electronics whose address is 12500 Beatrice Street, Los
Angeles CA 90066 USA, or through Avolites UK.
13.2.4 MIDI Problems
The console supports a full MIDI data rate burst for 2 seconds, after
that data may be lost since it cannot be processed.
A MIDI debug Terminal is available which shows you the MIDI
commands being received by the Pearl. To activate this :
Turn the key to System, then Press Softkeys A, D, F. The MIDI terminal
window is displayed on the VDU screen. Turn the key to Run to finish.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
13. Other features - Page 211
13.3
The stage remote (riggers remote)
The Pearl can be used with the optional Avolites Stage Remote. This is
a small hand-held controller which connects
to the console by a 25 pin serial cable. The
cable can be connected either way round and
can be plugged and unplugged at any time.
The remote is useful when setting up a show
as you can leave the console at the back of
the venue and use the Stage Remote to
operate it from the stage.
•
To set up the stage remote, set the
console to Program mode. On the User
Settings menu, set option 7 to “Remote
Control” (hold down AVO and press
Softkey C to display the User Settings
menu). Plug in the remote. Press the
blank white key on the bottom left hand
corner of the remote, the LEDs should
flash. Press Exit, then 111. The LEDs
should flash again to say the remote is
enabled.
•
To set a DMX channel to a particular
value, press DIM, type the DMX channel
number, press AT%, then 1-9 to set the
level or AT% again to set full. For
example, DIM 1 5 AT% AT% sets channel
15 to full.
•
You can access the 4 DMX lines using the
following numbers:
Line A - Channels 1-512
Line B - Channels 513-1024
Line C - Channels 1025 - 1536
Line D - Channels 1537 - 2048
•
The NEXT and LAST buttons turn on the channel after or the channel
before the one you just entered, at the last level you entered. Other
channels are turned off.
•
You can use THRU to turn on a range of channels, for example 2 1
THRU 1 0 0 AT% 5 would turn on channels 21 to 100 at 50%.
•
You can use the AND button to make up a list of channels to turn
on. For example, 2 1 THRU 3 0 AND 4 1 THRU 5 0 AT% 5 would
turn on channels 21-30 and 41-50 at 50%.
•
Pressing INSTD sets all channels to 0.
•
Recall a memory/chase by pressing MEM, then the playback
number, then AT%. The playback number is the button number on
the console, +15 if it’s on page B, +30 for page C, +45 for page D,
etc. Memories/chases are always turned on at 100%.
•
For a chase you can use the + and - buttons to step forwards and
backwards. You can use this to focus lights if you program a chase
with one light on in each step.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 212 - 13. Other features
13.4
•
To disable the remote, press EXIT then 0 0 0.
•
You can check if the remote is enabled or not by pressing the blank
button on the bottom left. If the LEDs flash once the remote is
disabled, if they flash twice it is enabled.
Pearl Tiger: installing the Tiger Wing
The Pearl Tiger has an optional “wing”
which can be plugged in to provide
playback faders 11-15. This makes the
number of playbacks the same as for the
Pearl 2008, and makes the Theatre Cue
masters available on faders 12-15 of the
wing.
To connect the Wing, turn off the
console power and connect the Wing’s
mini-DIN plug to the socket on the rear
of the Pearl Tiger. Then power up the
console again.
13.5
Pearl Tiger: Theatre Cue Master jumper links
If you are using Theatre Mode on the Pearl Tiger, by default the theatre
Cue Masters are only available on the optional Wing. If you do not have
the Wing, you can set internal jumper links so that the theatre Cue
Masters are moved to faders 7-10 on the main console.
Note:
If you exit Theatre Mode with the links set to the “2-3” position,
faders 7-10 will control playbacks 12-15, and playbacks 7-10
will not be accessible.
To set the links you must turn off the power and open the front panel of
the console. The links are found on the inside of the front panel near
the roller.
You must set all 8 links to the same position, either 1-2 or 2-3 as
shown in the pictures on the next page.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
13. Other features - Page 213
Theatre Cue
Masters on wing
(12-15)
A:
A
B:
B
Theatre Cue
Masters on
faders 7-10.
Playbacks on
faders 7-10
will become
inaccessible.
A
A:
B:
B
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 214 - 13. Other features
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
14. The Personality File System - Page 215
C H A P T E R
F O U R T E E N
14. The Personality File System
If you can’t find the personality for the fixture you’re using, or you want
to know how to create a personality file, this section has the details.
14.1
Help, I can’t find a personality for my fixture
Avolites has a large library of fixtures on the website at
http://www.avolitesdownload.com/Personality%20Library/Default.asp
which can be downloaded quickly onto floppy disk or USB memory
stick.
You can also use this page to request a personality for a fixture if one
doesn’t already exist, and to report problems with personalities.
If you frequently use a fixture which isn’t in the Pearl’s internal
personality library, you can download it and add it to the internal library
by following the instructions in section 13.1.2.
14.2
Create
14.2.1 What is and how do I write or change a Personality file?
The personality file is an ASCII text format file containing information
on how the desk should patch each channel of an instrument.
Since the files are in ASCII text format you can easily modify them and
create new versions for your own use. When editing files you must
ensure your word processor is set to save in plain ASCII text format. If
you use Windows Write make sure that when you open the file you
select ‘no conversion’ and when you close the file you save it in the
‘text file’ format.
Before editing make a backup of the original, in case your edits do not
work.
The Pearl normally stores the personality files in an internal cache so
that you don’t need to carry a personality disk around. The personality
cache is a special compressed file containing all the personalities. You
cannot currently add your own definitions to it, so you will have to load
your custom personalities from disk in the time-honoured fashion.
14.2.2 Personality file naming conventions
There are four extensions used by personality files: .PER, .D2, .R96 and
.R20.
Pearl software will read any .PER file and any.R96 file, however when
.PER files are read a message will be presented to the user to warn that
an old personality file is being used and not every function of the desk
will work correctly. Typically this includes tracking, pre-loaded focuses
locate fixture and tablet functions. .D2 files are for the Diamond II &
Diamond III.
Files with the extension .R20 can only be used with Sapphire ,Azure
and Pearl consoles from the 2000 range and later. These files have
additional fields for the enhanced functionality provided within these
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 216 - 14. The Personality File System
desks.
14.2.3 Personality File Keyword Order
Keywords should appear in the following order:DEVICE ...
TYPE ...
DEVICEADDRESS ...
DAEND ...
MINDMX ...
MAXDMX ...
DIVBY ...
MIRROR ...
DMX ...
DMX ...
TEXT ...
END
PFTABLE ...
PFEND
MACRO ...
MEND
14.2.4 The Instrument Name
The INSTRUMENT NAME will appear in the following format :DEVICE
XXXXXXXX
Where DEVICE is the keyword to tell the desk that an instrument
name follows and "XXXXXXX" is the name of the instrument, this
name can be 11 characters long and no spaces or tabs are allowed.
This instrument name will appear on a soft button when patching and is
used in various view screens when operating the desk.
It is usually easier to make the actual file name similar to the DEVICE
NAME to make things easier when servicing personality files.
14.2.5 The Device Type
The DEVICE TYPE will appear in the following format :TYPE
1 Y Z
Where TYPE is the keyword used to tell the desk that DEVICE TYPE
data follows.
"1", which is the first character on the line is no longer used but is
required for backward compatibility. This field may be used in future
versions and should always be "1".
Field "Y” tells the desk the number of ATTRIBUTES (channels) the
device uses, and entry "Z” gives information on the way the device is
to be patched.
Where:M patches from dmx 512 to 001 (downwards)
D patches from dmx 001 to 512 (upwards)
K for those devices where the dmx channels used are not
in consecutive slots
For example a TYPE-LINE can look like:TYPE
1 8 M
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
14. The Personality File System - Page 217
Setting the device to:- 8 channels used patched from 512 downwards
and the next line sets a device for 10 channels and patched from 001 to
512
TYPE
1 10 D
14.2.6 Fixture switch settings
This allows the desk to display the exact switch settings required to
configure a fixture for a given DMX address and to ensure it is set in
the correct mode.
The display can be configured in virtually any way required. The fixture
switch detail MUST be declared before the DMX declaration.
A number of variables are provided for use within this function, these
must be in lower case:d = dmx number the instrument is assigned to
h = handle the instrument will be operated from
n = the device name, given earlier in the personality file
The keywords associated with the fixture switch settings are:
DEVICEADDRESS
DAEND
MINDMX
MAXDMX
DIVBY
The screen space allowed for displaying the fixture information is 10
lines by 21 characters.
The start and end of the fixture switch detail is marked by
DEVICEADDRESS and DAEND.
The formula to display this information is restricted to 10 lines by 79
characters.
The three other variables must be defined for the instrument are:•
MINDMX = lowest DMX number the instrument can be addressed
•
MAXDMX = highest DMX address number the instrument
•
DIVBY = The difference of two dmx addresses selected by changing
the LS bit of the address switch.
For example if the instrument address switch increments the DMX
number by 1 then the difference DIVBY will be 1, if, like on the
Cyberlight it increments by 20 then DIVBY would be 20.
DIVBY is used to ensure that an instrument can be addressed at the
address proposed by the user when patching.
There follows an example for a Cyberlight.
;This instrument can only be switched to certain DMX addresses.
; variables used d=dmx number, h=handle, n=devicename;
"Address
%04b %1b001"16-(d/20%16),(d/20)/16
; This is the address display line
; 1. Items in quotes are displayed
; 2. First item here (Address
) is ascii text
; 3. %04b = 4 bits of binary data, 0 means display leading 0's
; 4. next is a space
; 5. %1b = 1 bit of binary data
; 6. 001 is ascii text again
; 7. Close quotes
; 8. first variable passed is 16-((d/20)%16)
;
(d/20) : dmx/20 giving fixture number
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 218 - 14. The Personality File System
;
%16
: isolates lower 4 bits
;
16: reverses the 4 bits
; 9. Second variable passed is (d/20)/16
;
(d/20) : dmx/20 giving the fixture number
;
/16
: isolates the upper 4 bits.
;DEVICEADDRESS
"Handle %2d"h
"Fixture %11s"n
"DMX
%03d"d
""
"Dip Switch 1234 5678"
"Personality 0000 0000"
"Address
%b%b%b%b %b001"d/20%2,d/40%2,d/80%2,d/160%2,d/320%2
""
"0=OFF ( Right )"
"1=ON ( Left )"
DAEND
MINDMX=1
MAXDMX=481
DIVBY=20
The next example is for a Colour Fader, This instrument uses a
GROUP and ADDRESS switch
; Upto 10 lines of 79 chars are allowed including formulae
; variables used d=dmx number, h=handle, n=devicename;
"Address
%04b %1b001"16-(d/20%16),(d/20)/16
; This is the address display line
; 1. Items in quotes are displayed
; 2. First item here (Address
) is ascii text
; 3. %04b = 4 bits of binary data, 0 means dislay leading 0's
; 4. next is a space
; 5. %1b = 1 bit of binary data
; 6. 001 is ascii text again
; 7. Close quotes
; 8. first variable passed is 16-((d/20)%16)
;
(d/20) : dmx/20 giving fixture number
;
%16
: isolates lower 4 bits
;
16: reverses the 4 bits
; 9. Second variable passed is (d/20)/16
;
(d/20) : dmx/20 giving the fixture number
;
/16
: isolates the upper 4 bits.
;
DEVICEADDRESS
"Handle %2d"h
"Fixture %11s"n
"DMX
%03d"d
""
"GROUP %2d"d/12+1
"CHANNEL %2d"d%12
""
""
""
""
DAEND
MINDMX=1
MAXDMX=508
DIVBY=3
14.2.7 Mirror
Mirror is used to define the instrument type - Moving head or Moving
mirror and the maximum Pan and Tilt angles through which the
instrument can move. These values are required for the 3D tracking
system. Typically a MIRROR line looks like:-
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
14. The Personality File System - Page 219
MIRROR
1 170 110
Where:MIRROR is the keyword
1 indicates moving mirror a 2 in this field indicates a moving head
instrument.
170 is the maximum pan movement.
110 is the maximum tilt movement.
14.2.8 The DMX/Preset Layout
The DMX/PRESET LAYOUT will appear in the following format:DMX
A B C D E F G H I J K L ; comment
A B C D E F G H I J K L; comment
END
Where DMX is the keyword to tell the desk dmx, preset and fader
information follows.
A: sets which Attribute button will be connected to the DMX channel,
defined later. The range is 1 to 20 for the desk, but up to 15 for
the tablet.
A 0 (zero) in this field indicates it is part of a 16 bit channel defined in
the previous line.
B: This tells the desk which wheel is used for that channel, where 1
means left and 61 right.
C: This is the channel type, currently there are 5 different channel types
available :H
(HTP) for dimmer
L
(LTP) for moving lights and scrollers
I
(instant)
S
(double byte) 16 bit LTP channel which does not fade
s
(double byte) 16 bit LTP channel
LTP channel which does not fade
D: This is the relative DMX address of the attribute being defined,
starting from 1.
E: This is the maximum output of that attribute in %, where 0 means
no output at all and 100% full output. This allows the channel to
be limited in level.
F: This sets the curve for that channel, DOM version 2.xx and up
supports 4 different curves :1 = linear curve
2 = square
3 = relay at 50%(128) on
4 = FD square
The curve number is prefixed a single letter which can be:N = normal
C = complemented curve (ie invert the channel)
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 220 - 14. The Personality File System
G: This is the link to the user tables and identifier for PAN and TILT.
This will be explained in the TABLES section. This entry can run
from A to F and 0 (zero) meaning no table entry.
H: This must always be 1 (The checksum facility has been removed).
I: This defines the channel name. This should be in inverted commas
and can be up to 11 characters long and it may include spaces.
This will be used on screen to identify the channel.
J , K and L: define three default levels that can be output. These are
Locate fixture, Highlight and Lowlight.
The range is 0..255 and -1 means no change to the output.
Locate Fixture is used in the moving light menu to turn on a
fixture and set channels to a level such that you can see where
the instrument is. Generally the settings give 50% pan 50% tilt,
white, no gobo, 100% dimmer.
Highlight and Lowlight are used when editing to brighten or
otherwise mark one instrument whilst the others are turned into
a dim state.
14.2.9 Text Field
The text field will be displayed when patching the devices.
This text field can hold any text you like, but generally it displays the
Attribute Bank layout of the device being patched.
If you are going to want to use the personalities on other Avolites
consoles, bear in mind that different consoles have different sized
displays. Limit the text to 20 characters a line if you want the
personality to be compatible.
14.2.10 The Preset Focus (Palette) table
Tables on the Pearl are for default Palettes which are automatically
loaded when an instrument is patched.
Two key lines are required for tables, the definition line and the data
line.
The definition line looks like:PFTABLE “table name” A B..
Where A is allows the table to be connected to a tablet attribute button.
With the instrument when the pen is clicked on the tablet the table list
appears on the VDU screen, moving the pen up or down allows selection of
a table entry.
The range for this is -1 meaning table is not attached to a tablet button
or 1..30 to define which button the table will be attached to.
Where B is the list of dmx channels values which will be defined within
the table.
For example:PFTABLE “GOBO” 3 4 7
The first word is the keyword PFTABLE to indicate that a preset focus
table follows.
Next follows the table name. This can be up to 11 characters and can
include spaces. It must begin and end with double quotes.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
14. The Personality File System - Page 221
The first number indicates which tablet attribute button the table will be
available on.
The final numbers are the actual DMX channel numbers.
The next lines contain the actual focus information and is defined as
follows:“focus name” palette entry number channel level(s)
When “focus name” this is the name given to the focus. This can be
up to 11 characters and can include spaces. It must begin and end with
double quotes.
When focus button number defines which palette entry will be used,
numbers 1..200 indicate the entry button number.
Where channel level(s) are the actual level output to the instrument.
This is must be in hexadecimal notation. If no value is required (the
entry is OFF) a -1 (minus one) should be placed in the field.
For example:“STAR GOBO” 20 0 FF ;
The first field is the name of the focus, STAR GOBO.
Next is the focus button number that the focus will be placed on. In
this case focus button 20.
Next are the data values.
The last line of the preset focus table must be:PFEND
There can be a number of preset focus tables.
14.2.11 Macros
Macros allow a defined set of channels to be adjusted rather like
running a chase. The principle use for this is to allow instruments to be
struck up or reset which sometimes requires a sequence of channels to
be turned on and off over a certain time scale.
Whilst a macro is running all other desk functions are locked out. The
macro progression is presented on the prompt line of the screen.
There are three key types of data line associated with macros, these
are:
•
MACRO “macro name” channel list
“data” data list
“delay” 1 time
MEND
Where “macro name” can be up to 11 characters and can include
spaces. It must begin and end with double quotes.
•
The channel list is the DMX channels for the instrument, to which data
will be passed from the data list.
•
“data” that the following data will be passed to the instrument. Note
that this MUST be in lower case and enclosed in double quotes.
•
data list is the data to be passed to the instrument. It must be in
hexadecimal notation..
•
“delay” This optional statement defines that a delay time before
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 222 - 14. The Personality File System
running the next step. When used it must be followed by a 1. This field
is for future use.
•
Time is the delay time in units of 0.1 seconds and is in hexadecimal.
3 seconds would be 2E
Macros must terminate with the statement MEND
A typical example macro is:MACRO “HOME” 1 18 20 ; send instrument to home position
“data” 0 FF 0
“delay” 1 20
“data” 0 0 FF
“delay” 1 20 ; wait about 2.5 seconds
“data” 0 0 40
“delay” 1 40 ; wait about 5 seconds
“data” 0 0 0
MEND
14.2.12 Range tables
Range tables give names to the attribute values; for example on the
shutter channel, 0-7 is “closed”, 8-119 is “strobe”. This information is
displayed above the control wheels when Intelligent Attribute Display is
enabled.
The definition line looks like:RANGE attribute number
And each entry in the table:
Low DMX value HIGH DMX value TEXT
“Low” is the bottom of the range, “High” is the top of the range, both
inclusive figures.
Variables can be used in the TEXT field to display numbers; a is the low
value, b is the high value and c is the actual DMX value.
;-------------------------------------------------------; Range Tables
; Column by column description...
; 1. Low DMX value (inclusive)
; 2. High DMX value (inclusive)
; 3. Displayed text (max 11 chars)
; Variables used a=low val, b=high val, c=DMX val
RANGE 8
0
7
8
119
120 136
137 153
134 170
171 187
188 204
205 221
222 255
REND
;Shutter
"Closed"
"Strobe %3d%%"0+(((c-a)*100)/(b-a))
"Flash Beat"
"Flash Music"
"BO Gobo"
"BO Colour"
"BO Col+Gobo"
"Slow Gobo"
"Open"
14.2.13 Example Personality File for the High End Cyberlight
Items in BOLD are required, everything else is comments which can be
freely changed deleted etc. comments always precede a ;.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
14. The Personality File System - Page 223
; "High End Cyberlight mode 1", 20 DMX channels, filename :hecyber1.per
;
;
Date
By
Description
;
26-05-94 Salzedo
created
;
10-08-94 Anwar
revised dmx slots
;
07-09-94 J.B.Toby revised for Pearl use/relocation of channels
;
11-11-94 J.B.Toby revised to match PerManML
;
22-05-96 S. Anwar Pan/Tilt channel identification & Resolution inserted
;
04-03-96 S. Anwar Revised for Pearl 96
;---------------------------------------------------------------------------; The device name, upto 11 characters, no spaces are allowed
DEVICE CYBER_mode1
;
;---------------------------------------------------------------------------; The Type of instrument, 1 & M are required for backward compatibility
; The middle number denotes the number of DMX channels used
TYPE 1 20 M
;
;---------------------------------------------------------------------------; Mirror/Head resolution
MIRROR
1
170
108
;
|
|
|
;
|
|
|_______ maximum tilt movement (in degrees)
;
|
|___________ maximum pan movement (in degrees)
;
|_______________ 1 means moving mirror, 2 means moving head
;
;---------------------------------------------------------------------------; Patching Information. (Upto 10 lines allowed)
; Upto 10 lines of 159 chars are allowed including formulae
; Variables used d=dmx number(1..512), h=handle(1..60), n=devicename (11-char)
; Allowed modifiers
;
+,-,*,/,(,) basic arithmatic
;
% means remainder after divide
;
& means logical AND
;
| means logical OR
;
R means reverse the bits of the curernt result (operates on a byte)
;
^ means logical Exclusive OR (operates on a byte)
;
> means shift to the right
;
< shift to the left
;
r followed by number means get the value of that parameter
;
d DMX address
;
n Fixture name, a 0 terminated character string
;
h The handle number
DEVICEADDRESS
"Handle %2d"h
"Fixture %11s"n
"DMX
%03d"d
""
"Dip Switch 1234 5678"
"Personality 0000 0000"
"Address
%b%b%b%b %b001"d/20%2,d/40%2,d/80%2,d/160%2,d/320%2
""
"0=OFF ( Right )"
"1=ON ( Left )"
DAEND
;
;---------------------------------------------------------------------------; Specify DMX limits
;
; minimum allowed dmx number
MINDMX=1
;
; maximum allowed dmx number
MAXDMX=481
;
; DMX number must be divisible by this
DIVBY=20
;
;---------------------------------------------------------------------------; DMX channel description
;
; Column by column description of each DMX channel
; 1. The channels bank number (1..12)
; 2. The upper faders in the bank (1) or the lower faders in the bank (61)
; 3. Channel type (L=LTP, H=HTP, I=Instant LTP, S=16-bit instant LTP,
;
s=16-bit Fadeable LTP
; 4. DMX offset (1..number of DMX channels)
; 5. The output level is proportionally reduced by this level (0..100%)
; 6. The curve number (applicable only to HTP channels), usually set to 1
; 7. Inverted (I) or Normal (N)
; 8. Attribute type (A=Colour Wheel, BCD=Colour Mix, E=Pan, F=Tilt,
;
0=uncategorised)
; 9. Checksum channel (Always 1)
;10. Attribute name, must be enclosed in quotes and upto 12 characters allowed
;11. The ON value of this channel (0..255)
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 224 - 14. The Personality File System
;12. The Highlight level of this channel
;13. The Lolight level of this channel
;
DMX
3 61
S
1 100 1N E
1
"Pan"
128
-1
-1 ; PAN
0
0
L
2 100 1N E
1
"Pan Low"
128
-1
-1 ; PAN Low
3
1
S
3 100 1N F
1
"Tilt"
128
-1
-1 ; TILT
0
0
L
4 100 1N F
1
"Tilt Low"
128
-1
-1 ; TILT Low
4
1
I
5 100 1N 0
1
"Colour Wheel"
0
0
0 ; COLOUR WHEEL
10 1
L
6 100 1N B
1
"Cyan"
255 255 255 ; CYAN
10 61
L
7 100 1N D
1
"Magenta"
255 255
0 ; MAGENTA
9 61
L
8 100 1N C
1
"Yellow"
255 255
0 ; YELLOW
6
1
I
9 100 1N 0
1
"Gobo 1"
0
0
0 ; GOBO 1
6 61
I
10 100 1N 0
1
"Gobo 2"
0
0
0 ; GOBO 2
8 61
I
11 100 1N 0
1
"Gobo Speed"
0
0
0 ; GOBO SPEED
5
1
L
12 100 1N 0
1
"Zoom"
0
0
0 ; ZOOM
5 61
L
13 100 1N 0
1
"Focus"
0
-1
-1 ; FOCUS
2
1
I
14 100 1N 0
1
"Iris "
255 255 255 ; IRIS
9
1
I
15 100 1N 0
1
"Effects"
0
0
0 ; EFFECT WHEEL
7 61
I
16 100 1N 0
1
"Frost"
0
0
0 ; FROST
2 61
L
17 100 1N 0
1
"Shutter"
255 255 255 ; SHUTTER
1
1
H
18 100 1N 0
1
"Dimmer"
255 255 255 ; DIMMER
8
1
L
19 100 1N 0
1
"Motor Speed"
255 255 255 ; MOTOR SPEED
11 1
I
20 100 1N 0
1
"Control"
0
0
0 ; Control
END
;
;---------------------------------------------------------------------------; Text to be displayed when the Instrument is selected for Patching
;
TEXT
Cyberlight Mode 1
Bank
Faders
Bottom
Top
--------------------1 Dimmer
-2 Iris
Shutter
3 Tilt
Pan
4 Colour 1 -5 Focus
Zoom
6 Gobo 1
Gobo 2
7 Frost
-8 M-speed Gobo spd
9 Effect
Yellow
10 Cyan
Magenta
11 Control -INPUT and/or note DMX
number.
Press a channel grab
to make patch
END
;
;---------------------------------------------------------------------------; Tables
; A colour table colour wheel, cyan, magenta, yellow
PFTABLE "Colour" -1 5
6 7 8
"Col 1"
1 0 ff ff ff
"Col 2"
2 0 ff 0 0
"Col 3"
3 0
0 ff 0
"Col 4"
4 0
0 0 ff
"Col 5"
5 0 ff ff 0
"Col 6"
6 0
0 ff ff
"Col 7"
7 0 ff 0 ff
"Col 8"
8 0 97 32 c8
"Col 9"
9 0 3d a3 bd
"Col 10"
10 0 eb 5a 17
PFEND
; Gobo
PFTABLE "Gobos" -1 9 10 11
"Gobo 1.1"
11 2 0
"Gobo 1.2"
12 af 0
"Gobo 1.3"
13 b9 0
"Gobo 1.4"
14 c3 0
"Gobo 1.5"
15 cc 0
"Gobo 1.6"
16 d7 0
"Gobo 1.7"
17 e1 0
"Gobo 2.1"
18 0 2d
"Gobo 2.2"
19 0 4b
"Gobo 2.3"
20 0 5f
PFEND
; Positions
PFTABLE "Positions" -1 1 3
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
14. The Personality File System - Page 225
"Middle"
"Left"
"Right"
"Top"
"Bottom"
"TLeft"
"TRight"
"BLeft"
"BRight"
PFEND
MACRO "HOME"
"data"
"delay"
"data"
"delay"
"data"
"delay"
"data"
MEND•
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
80
50
b0
80
80
50
b0
50
b0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
MACRO "SHUTDOWN"
"data"
"delay"
"data"
"delay"
"data"
"delay"
"data"
MEND
80
80
80
50
b0
50
b0
b0
50
18
ff
20
0
20
0
40
0
20
ff
2
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
18
ff
20
0
20
0
40
0
ff
40
0
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
20
ff
ff
80
0
Page 226 - 14. The Personality File System
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
15. Glossary of terms - Page 227
15. Glossary of terms
4D TRACK
The unique Avolites moving light Tracking system
available using the Graphics Tablet.
ABSOLUTE
Mode for colours and positions on the Graphics Tablet
in which the output of the Fixture corresponds
directly with the position of the stylus on the Tablet.
See NUDGE.
ADD
Type of flash button which adds the output being
flashed into the existing output of the console. Now
referred to as FLASH buttons.
ADDRESSES
The DMX Channels occupied by individual Fixtures.
The first Channel occupied is usually encoded onto
the Fixture somehow (often by switches) and called
its ADDRESS.
ALIGN
A means of copying Attribute characteristics from the
first Fixture selected to other selected Fixtures,
resulting in the Fixtures being aligned to each other.
ATTRIBUTE
One Channel of an Intelligent Fixture.
ATTRIBUTE BANK
A set of buttons controlling which Attributes the
wheels connect to.
AVOS
The most basic Operating mode in the console. AVOS
allows loading of the System Software.
BACKUPS
Copies of a show stored to disk for safety.
BPM
Beats Per Minute.
CHASE
A sequence of one or more pre recorded steps
programmed using the CHASE button. It can be
replayed automatically if desired. Sometimes known
as SEQUENCE, STACK or Linked Cues.
CHASE STEPS
Individual component steps of a Chase. See above
COLOUR CHANGER
A mechanical Fixture for changing the colour of a
light source, usually by scrolling through a roll of
different coloured gels or by moving special filters
into the light beam.
COLOUR MIX
A system of three filters that can each crossfade
from white to a colour, or one colour to another. It is
a feature of some Intelligent Fixtures, which enables
thousands of different colours to be created.
COMPLEX STEP
A Chase Step that has Individual Step Times
programmed into it, and hence will not use Global
times. See SIMPLE STEP, GLOBAL CHASE TIMES,
INDIVIDUAL STEP TIMES.
CONNECTED CHASE A Chase which has been brought under control of the
Wheels and other Chase functions by pressing the
CONNECT button.
COPY
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
A system of replication of Memories and Chases that
links all the copies together. A change in any one of
Page 228 - 15. Glossary of terms
the replicas results in the same change to all of
them. See PHOTOCOPY.
CROSSFADE
Or X FADE. A change in lighting state in which all
HTP channels are assumed to be ON. HTP channels
which are not explicitly set at a level will fade to
zero. LTP channels follow Move Fade rules. See
MOVE FADE
DEVICE
See FIXTURE.
DMX
DMX512(1990) a specification for communication
between control desks and Fixtures, Originally for
Dimmers it has been adopted as a control protocol
for most Intelligent Fixtures. It can carry 512
different Channels of data.
DMX TRANSMISSION RATE
The rate at which DMX data is broadcast from the
desk to the Fixtures.
FADE
A continuous transition from one level to another.
FADING CHANNEL
A channel which can ramp from one level to another.
See INSTANT CHANNELS.
FIXTURE
Any lighting instrument that is patched using a
Personality. Generally refers to a moving light or
colour changer, not an individual Dimmer channel.
Also called Intelligent Fixture, Device, Instrument,
Moving Light.
FLASH
Type of flash button which adds the output being
flashed into the existing output of the console.
Historically called the ADD button. See also SWOP.
FLIP
A function for use with Moving Head Fixtures. They
have two possible Pan and Tilt positions for each
point on stage, and FLIP will alternate between them.
FOCUS
What Palettes are called on other Avolites consoles.
Occasionally some screen messages may display this
term. See PALETTE.
GENERIC
Term used to indicate a Dimmer channel. See also
FIXTURE.
GLOBAL CHASE TIMES
Fade and Wait times which apply to any Chase Step
which does not have Individual Step times
programmed into it. These steps are called SIMPLE
STEPS. See INDIVIDUAL STEP TIMES, COMPLEX
STEP, SIMPLE STEP.
GRAPHICS TABLET
Optional input device for the Pearl that controls
Dimmers and Fixtures by means of clicking a Stylus
or a Puck on an electronic slate.
GROUP
A GROUP is a pre-programmed collection of Fixtures
that can be selected with a single button press.
HANDLE
The fader and flash/swop buttons which are used to
control an individual fixture or dimmer channel.
HTP
Highest Takes Precedence, a mechanism for
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
15. Glossary of terms - Page 229
determining the output level of a Channel held in
more than one Playback Channel. The Channel
outputting the Highest value at any given time will
always determine the level of the Channel. Also see
LTP.
INCLUDE
A means of transferring the contents of a Memory or
Chase Step into the Programmer.
INDIVIDUAL STEP TIMES
Times programmed into one individual Chase Step
from the TIMES menu. These steps are called
COMPLEX STEPS. See GLOBAL CHASE TIMES,
SIMPLE STEP, COMPLEX STEP.
INSTANT CHANNEL
A channel which does not use fades generated by the
console, and moves in discrete jumps from one state
to another. See FADING CHANNEL.
INSTANT ACCESS
A function on the Graphics Tablet that does not
require the correct Attribute Bank to be selected in
order to control an Attribute.
INSTRUMENT
See FIXTURE.
INTELLIGENT FIXTURE
See FIXTURE.
LCD
Refers to the console’s on-board displays (stands for
Liquid Crystal Display).
LED
Refers to the small red lights within the buttons on
the console (stands for Light Emitting Diode).
LINKS
Connections between Chase Steps enabling them to
run on from one to another automatically.
LOCATE FIXTURE
A feature of the console that makes it easy to find
your selected Fixtures by putting them in Open White
with Pan and Tilt at 50%.
LTP
Latest Takes Precedence, a mechanism for passing
control of a channel from one Playback Fader to
another on the basis that the latest Playback Fader
to be moved has control, providing that Playback
Fader has moved passed the Trigger point. (See
TRIGGER POINT). Also see HTP.
MACROS
Macros allow functions programmed into an
Intelligent Fixture by the manufacturer to can be
executed by sending a DMX command sequence from
the console. They can allow you to reset the Fixture
for example. The DMX command sequences are
defined within the Personality File.
MEMORY
A single stage look programmed onto a Playback
button or fader. It does not have Wait times. Also
known as CUE, STATE, SCENE, LOOK.
MEMORY MODE
A playback format programmed into a Memory.
There are Memory Modes 0, 1 and 2.
MIDI
Stands for Musical Instrument Digital Interface. It is
the established hardware and software specification
enabling the exchange of data between digital
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 230 - 15. Glossary of terms
musical instruments (such as keyboards) and other
devices such as computers, sequencers and sound
and lighting consoles.
ML MENU
Stands for Moving Light Menu.
MOVE FADE
A change in lighting state in which only those
channels that are ON change in level.
NUDGE
Mode for colours and positions on the Graphics Tablet
in which the output of the Fixture changes relative to
the movement of the stylus on the Tablet. See
ABSOLUTE.
PALETTE
A term used to describe a referenced pre-defined
state for an Attribute that can be recalled whenever
required during programming. Each Fixture may be
different in the Palette, the entries can be named,
and recalled with a single button press.
PARK
This happens to a fixture when its DMX address is
taken by another fixture during a later patching
session. The fixture must then be repatched.
PERSONALITY FILE
A description of what Attributes a particular
Intelligent Fixture has and how the console will patch
and use these. It also determines which Attribute
Bank will control which Attribute. Avolites Personality
Files are in ASCII format and can be edited on any
personal computer which can read and save onto MS
DOS 1.44 Mb (High Density) 3.5 inch disks.
PERSONALITY DISK A disk on which Personality Files are stored.
PHOTOCOPY
A method of replicating Memories and Chases that
are completely independent of each other. See COPY.
PLAYBACK
Area of the console that can replay recorded
Memories or Chases using Playback Faders.
PRESET FADERS
The 100 faders across the top of the console which
are used for controlling individual fixtures or dimmer
channels.
PRESET FOCUS
What Palettes are called on other Avolites consoles.
Occasionally some VDU screen messages may display
this term. See PALETTE.
PROGRAM
Desk mode in which programming functions are
enabled, but System Software is protected. See RUN,
SYSTEM.
PROGRAMMER
The part of the console which contains Channel
information which has been changed by the user,
prior to recording.
RUN
Desk mode in which all Playback functions are
enabled, but all programming functions disabled.
SCRIPT FILES
System that allows Playback to be automated and
controlled by Timecode.
SELECTED
A Fixture that is under manual control.
SEQUENCE
See CHASE.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
15. Glossary of terms - Page 231
SHAPE
A preprogrammed effect available which is applied to
an Attribute. It can then be customised and stored in
a Memory.
SHARED PALETTE
A Palette in which information is only stored for one
Fixture, but is available to all Fixtures of that type.
SIMPLE STEP
A Chase Step which does not have Individual Step
Times programmed into it, and hence will use Global
Chase times. See COMPLEX STEP, GLOBAL CHASE
TIMES, INDIVIDUAL STEP TIMES.
SOFTKEY
Buttons marked A-F, with different functions which
are shown on the VDU screen.
STACK
See CHASE.
STAGE REMOTE
Optional input device for the Pearl allowing control of
DMX Channels and recall of Memories and Chase
Steps.
SWOP
Type of flash button which turns on the output being
flashed and turns off all other output while the
button is pressed. Sometimes called “Solo”. Also
used for selecting fixtures or playbacks when
programming. See also FLASH.
SYSTEM
Desk mode allowing access to the operating software
of the Pearl.
SYSTEM SOFTWARE The software which runs the Pearl.
TC
Abbreviation for Timecode. In the Pearl, this is
always MIDI Timecode.
TRACKING
A mode in which Moving Lights can move around an
area all pointing at the same spot.
TRAINING
The process of recording points on a stage so that
the console can work out the TRACKING for Moving
Lights.
TRIGGER POINT
The level set in the User Settings which determines
at which point a Playback Fader triggers the LTP
Channels programmed onto it.
UNFOLD
A function that allows Chase Steps to be laid out onto
Playback Faders for easy editing.
USER SETTINGS
User definable desk settings. Found in the USER
SETTINGS menu.
VDU
A computer monitor plugged into the VDU socket on
the Pearl giving further information about the
operation of the console.
WAIT
A period of time that elapses before a Fade happens
in a Chase.
WIPEALL
A process which clears all the previous programming
out of the desk, but does not touch the System
Software.
WHEEL A
This is the left hand wheel. It is used to control the
upper Attribute of each Attribute Bank.
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Page 232 - 15. Glossary of terms
WHEEL B
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
This is the right hand wheel. It is used to control the
lower Attribute of each Attribute Bank.
16. Index - Page 233
16. Index
Pages in the Tutorial section have numbers below 100. Pages in
the Reference manual have numbers above 100.
A
acceleration mode of wheels · 126,
197
active shape, selecting · 143
adjusting beam position (nudge) ·
46, 181
Advanced theatre options · 177
align function · 17, 128
assign action · 191
assign timecode · 192
at % · 42, 130
attributes
controlling · 16, 126
masking out in palette · 20
setting · 16, 126
audio gain links · 207
audio input socket · 110
autoconnect chase option · 160
autoloading memories in theatre
mode · 173
automated playback · 187
autorun · 190
Avolites console overview · 55
AVOS link · 207
AVOS operating system · 203, 205
AVOS2 · 204
B
backing up to disk · 13, 111
backup usb drive · 202
banks of attributes buttons · 16, 126
bass trigger · 39, 167
Blind mode · 156
BPM, displaying speed in · 195, 227
brightness · 110
busking · 48, 184
C
cache builder · 215
cache, personality · 119
calculator mode · 132
catalogue a disk · 197
channel button · 42, 130
channel level mimics · 49, 185
chase
adding new steps · 162
autoconnect option · 160
clearing temporary speed · 37, 161
complex steps · 166
connect · 160
connecting · 36, 160, 161
copying · 38, 164
copying a step · 163
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
deleting · 38, 165
deleting a step · 163
deleting a step number · 165
display · 160
displaying speed in BPM · 195, 227
editing current step · 164
editing using unfold · 37, 163
inserting a step · 163
inserting steps · 162
jumping back a step · 161, 164
linking or unlinking steps · 165
live editing · 164
manual fading using wheels · 161
options · 159
pausing · 41, 161, 164
preload · 160
preloading first step · 36
programming · 35, 159
random order · 168
recording · 35, 159
renumbering steps · 163
running · 36, 160
set legend · 160
setting direction · 161
setting global times · 165
setting speed and crossfade · 36, 160
setting time of live step · 38, 164
shapes in · 35, 159
sound activation · 39, 167
speed and crossfade · 36, 160
takeover after go · 169
tap tempo · 161
unlinking steps · 165
using as a stack · 38
using Unfold to edit · 37, 163
viewing results of editing · 164
viewing steps on display · 162
viewing timings · 167
chase autoconnect setting · 195
chase button · 35, 159
checking the patch settings · 120
Choose a fixture · 10
clear button · 19, 28, 29, 136, 148
Clear temporary speed · 37, 161
clear Wrap around channels · 201
clearing the console · 197
clearing the programmer · 29, 136,
148
clock timecode · 193
clock, setting · 201
coarse spread · 25, 142
colour mix (graphics tablet) · 46,
181
complex or simple steps in chase ·
166
configure a MIDI keyboard · 201
connect · 160
connect button · 36, 160, 161
connecting the wheels to a chase ·
36, 160, 161
connections · 110
contrast · 110
controlling attributes · 16
copying a chase · 38, 164
copying a chase step · 163
copying a memory · 30, 154
Page 234 - 16. Index
copying settings from other fixtures
(align) · 17, 128
creating a script file · 187
creating and recalling groups · 142
current step (theatre mode) · 172
cut to live · 43, 176
D
delatch fixtures button (graphics
tablet) · 182
delete button · 31, 38, 155
deleting a chase · 38, 165
deleting a chase step · 163
deleting a cue in theatre mode · 176
deleting a memory · 31, 155
deleting a numbered chase step ·
165
deleting patched dimmers or fixtures
· 121
deselecting all fixtures · 132
desk lamp · 111
diagnostic screen · 203
dimmers
control using preset faders · 15, 125
entering level as number · 129
patching · 8, 118
patching to top faders · 9, 118
selecting · 15, 125
two preset mode · 185
disabling a fixture or dimmer · 129
disallowing speed wheel · 169
disk
backing up · 13, 111
personality · 10
disk functions · 197
displaying the DMX addresses · 12,
120
DMX address
displaying · 12, 120
repatching · 12, 121
DMX idle time, setting · 196
DMX in socket · 110, 153
DMX line
channel numbers from stage remote ·
211
selecting · 11, 118, 119, 121
setting output connectors · 123
DMX output sockets · 1, 109
DMX output, reducing transmitted
channels · 195
DMX, explanation of · 53
F
fade times for memory · 32, 155
fader trigger point · 195
fading to palettes · 139
fan button · 18, 131
Find fixture · 123
finding a lost fixture · 123
fine spread · 25, 142
fixture page buttons · 3, 7, 113,
117, 125
Fixture Patch · 12, 114, 120
fixture select mode · 128
fixture type for palettes · 140
fixtures
deselecting · 132
entering attributes as number · 130
grouping together · 127
loading selected into programmer · 31,
152
patching · 118, 120
recalling a group · 17
reducing intensity during show · 129
removing from programmer · 132
reset command · 132
saving as a group · 17
selecting · 15, 125
selecting a range of · 15, 125, 128
selecting on graphics tablet · 46, 180
set central position · 15
striking lamp · 132
fixtures or mimics · 46
flip function · 128
focus button · 19, 48, 136, 184
focus mask · 153, 196
format a disk · 197
G
gain link · 110
global times for chase, setting · 165
glossary of lighting words · 227
go button · 38, 41, 43, 171, 175
grand master fader · 18, 49, 183,
196
grand master, disabling · 196
graphics tablet
connecting · 45
functions · 46, 180
using the pen · 180
graphics tablet status on VDU · 182
groups
creating and recalling · 142
recalling · 17
recalling by number · 130
recalling on graphics tablet · 46, 180
saving fixtures into · 17
E
Edit a shape · 142, 143, 144
edit times · 32, 155
editing a chase · 37, 163
editing a chase step using unfold ·
163
editing a cue in theatre mode · 176
editing a shape · 141, 143
editing current chase step · 164
editing memories · 31, 152
entering 0-255 values · 130
entering dimmer levels directly · 129
entering fixture attributes directly ·
130
entering percent values · 130
even spread · 25, 142
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
groups of fixtures · 127
H
handle · 7, 117, 121
highlight · 39, 128
Highlight enabled · 132
highlighting selected fixture · 128
HTP and LTP channels, description of
· 27, 150
16. Index - Page 235
defining in personality · 221
running · 132
I
illegal DMX address · 120, 217
include button · 31, 152
include function · 31, 152
including a theatre stack step · 153
including DMX from DMX in socket ·
153
individual palettes · 21, 135
input step (theatre mode) · 172
Insert button · 162
inserting a chase step · 163
instant LTP mode option · 122
instant palettes · 184
Intelligent Attribute Display · 16,
126
intensity
manual control of HTP/LTP fades ·
161
master fade time · 140
master faders · 49, 183
master time for palettes · 140
memories
editing · 31, 152
recording a snapshot of the stage · 149
memory
applying palette to fixtures in · 48, 184
copying · 30, 154
deleting · 31, 155
editing · 31, 152
fade times · 32, 155
playing back · 29
preload · 29
record stage · 148
recording · 28, 148
setting a legend · 30, 148
setting fade times · 32, 155
turning on by MIDI · 201
using shapes · 33, 149
control using preset faders · 126
entering level as number · 129
invalid license · 206
invert attribute option · 122
J
jumping to a cue in theatre mode ·
43, 176
K
keyswitch · 8, 111
L
LCD screen views · 113
legends
entering palette · 138
setting for memory · 30, 148
setting playback legend · 30, 148
license error message · 206
linked copies of chasess · 38
linked copies of memories · 30, 154
linking or unlinking chase steps · 165
live time button · 43, 173
load shape file · 201
load visualiser CSV file · 197
loading a memory into the
programmer · 152
loading a memory into the
programmer (include) · 31
locate fixture · 15, 18, 21, 23, 34,
125
Locate Fixture no Pan & Tilt · 125
lock desk · 47, 185
locking the console · 47, 185
looping script files · 190
LTP and HTP channels, description of
· 27, 150
LTP, instant mode · 122
luminosity (graphics tablet) · 46,
181
M
macros
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Memory button · 28, 29, 31, 33,
148, 152, 154
memory mode, setting · 144, 145,
155, 156
MIDI channel, setting · 196
MIDI commands · 209
MIDI timecode · 187
mimic mode on presets · 49, 185
ML menu · 131
mode 0-1-2 memory · 156
N
naming playback pages · 149, 151
next time button · 43, 173
normal run mode · 47, 183
nudge button (graphics tablet) · 46,
181
numbers of palette buttons · 136
numeric entry of levels · 42
O
Off button · 153
On-the-fly editing · 191
options for patching · 122
options, setting back to default · 196
options, setting console · 195
Outputting DMX lines from other
connectors · 123
overriding playbacks · 19, 28, 184
overview of console · 2
P
page
playback · 29, 151
roller page buttons · 30, 151
selecting fixture pages · 3, 7, 113, 117,
125
Palette Pages · 136, 137, 195
palette/flash buttons · 20, 137
palettes · 19, 135
applying · 19, 136
entering legends · 138
Page 236 - 16. Index
fading · 48, 139, 184
fading over time · 48, 184
fixture type · 140
instant · 184
master fade time · 140
master time for fades · 140
numbering · 136
only saving certain attributes · 20, 135
options · 140
quick palette · 184
quick palettes · 137, 138
recalling · 136
recalling by number · 130
recalling on graphics tablet · 46, 180
recording · 20
removing attribute from (Off) · 154
shared and individual · 21, 135
stored as a reference · 135
storing on graphics tablet · 181
viewing · 139
pan and tilt, swapping · 122
parked fixtures · 121
password for AVOS · 205
Patch Utilities · 12, 122
patching · 7, 117
changing DMX address · 12, 121
changing handle · 121
checking settings · 120
deleting dimmers or fixtures · 121
dimmers · 8, 118
fixture with separate dimmer · 120
fixtures · 118, 120
invert attribute · 122
options · 122
parked fixture · 121
pending dimmer · 120
personality disk · 10, 215
personality files · 10, 215
personality files & cache · 119
personality library, updating · 202
personality, loading updated version
· 201
photocopy button · 30, 38, 155
playback
flash and swop buttons · 29
preload · 151
setting legend · 30, 148
R
random chase · 168
range tables · 16, 127
real time recording · 187
Rec. Step button · 164
recalling a palette · 136
record by fixture / by channel modes
· 32, 147
record palette entries on graphics
tablet · 181
record stage · 148
recording a chase · 35, 159
recording a memory · 28, 148
recording in Blind mode · 156
recording in real time · 187
recording the whole stage
(snapshot) · 149
reduce intensity · 129
release fixture button (graphics
tablet) · 182
release notes · 59
Remove shapes from selected
fixtures · 142
removing attribute from memory
(Off) · 153
removing fixtures from programmer
· 132
renumbering chase steps · 163
Reset button · 110
resetting a fixture · 132
restore usb drive · 202
review button · 128, 164
roller · 29, 30, 151
roller page buttons · 29, 151
Run mode
normal · 47, 151, 160, 183, 185
takeover · 47, 111, 183
run modes · 47, 183
running a chase · 36, 160
running a show in theatre mode ·
43, 175
playback pages
naming · 149, 151
selecting · 29, 151
playing back a memory · 29, 151
plotting a cue in theatre mode · 172
preload · 29, 151, 160
Preset LEDs mimic/fixture · 49, 185
previewing chase steps on display ·
162
program mode · 41, 111, 117, 129
programmer · 19, 28
clearing · 29, 136, 148
loading memory into (include) · 152
reloading memory into (include) · 31
programmer, the · 147
programmer, viewing contents · 150
programming a chase · 35, 159
Q
quick palette · 184, 195
Qwerty socket · 110
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
S
save show to disk · 197
saving chase speed · 36, 160
saving the show to disk · 13, 111
script files · 187
Autorun · 190
copying · 193
creating · 187
deleting · 193
editing · 191
looping · 190
playback · 188
playback in run mode · 189
recording for time of day playback · 187
running on power up · 190
timer source · 189
timing · 191
select a timer source · 187, 188,
192, 193
select a timer source (script files) ·
189
select fixtures or dimmers · 15, 125
selecting a DMX line · 11, 118, 119,
121
selecting a range of fixtures · 15,
125, 128
16. Index - Page 237
selecting a shape · 23, 141
selecting playback pages · 29, 151
selecting the active shape · 143
sequence control buttons · 128
serial socket · 110, 195
service mode · 203
Set Legend · 30, 37, 43, 139, 148,
149, 151, 160, 173
set wheels A=Size B=Speed · 24,
142
set wheels to Spread · 25, 143
setting attributes · 126
setting chase speed · 36, 160
setting fade times for a memory ·
32, 155
setting position of fixture · 16
setting the clock · 201
shape generator · 23, 141
shape merge · 144
shapes
changing direction · 144
coarse and fine spread · 25, 142
editing · 141, 143
fading size or speed · 144
in theatre mode · 172
loading new shape file · 201
offset · 145
positioning · 24, 141
removing from fixtures · 142
selecting · 23, 141
selecting active shape · 143
setting size and speed · 24, 142
static or timed · 144
using in chases · 35, 159
using in memories · 33, 149
shared palettes · 21, 135
simple/complex chase steps · 164
Snap Back button · 161
snapshot function · 149
software upgrade, loading · 204, 205
software, changes to · 59
sound activation of chases · 39, 167
sound input · 110
sound to light · 39, 60, 168
sound to light, saving show as old
version · 198
Specify Attributes for Bank · 138,
153, 196
speed=Seconds / BPM · 195
spread (shapes) · 25, 143
spreading a shape · 25, 142
stacks · 38, 165
stage remote, use of · 211
stepping through a range of fixtures
· 128
stop and go buttons · 41, 171
Stop button · 43, 161, 164, 175
stopping a chase · 41, 161, 164
store palette · 20, 136
striking a fixture lamp · 132
swap pan and tilt option · 122
swop button
playbacks (chase) · 36
playbacks (memory) · 28
presets · 7, 11, 125
T
takeover after Go · 169
takeover run mode · 47, 111, 183
TAN display · 182
tap tempo · 39, 161
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
temporary chase speed · 37, 161
testing system hardware · 204
theatre mode
advanced options · 177
autoloads · 173
controls · 41, 171
cue timings · 43, 173
deleting a cue · 176
displaying cues · 173
displaying timings · 174
editing a cue · 176
enabling and disabling · 41, 171
jumping to a cue · 43, 176
linking or unlinking steps · 174
manual fades · 43, 175
naming a cue · 43, 173
plotting a cue · 42, 172
running a chase in a cue · 173
running the show · 43, 175
setting fader links on Tiger · 212
turning on and off · 41, 171
using on Tiger · 41, 171
using shapes · 172
through · 42, 130
tiger
links to set theatre mode faders · 212
theatre mode · 41, 171
tiger wing
installing · 212
time of live step, setting · 38, 164
Timecode checking mode · 196
timed palettes · 48, 184
top faders
patching to · 9, 118
selecting fixtures patched to · 16
tracking · 147
tracking mode
setting up · 132
tracking mode on graphics tablet ·
181
Tracking On · 133
training the Pearl for tracking · 132
troubleshooting
usb drives · 198
turning attributes off · 153
two preset mode · 185
U
Unfold function · 37, 163
unlinking chase steps · 165
update personality · 201
Upgrading system software · 203,
205
usb drive
folder organisation · 202
usb drive problems · 198
USB socket · 110
USB stick options · 201
Use preset palettes · 10, 14, 19, 119
user curve format · 197
user settings menu · 195
using selected fixtures from a
memory · 31, 152
V
VDU screen
connecting · 1, 110
views of outputs · 114
VDU socket · 110
Page 238 - 16. Index
view button · 113
view programmer · 150
viewing chase steps on display · 162
viewing chase timings · 167
viewing contents of a palette · 139
Visualiser · 110
Visualiser (user setting) · 196
voltage selector · 1, 109
W
wheels
acceleration · 126, 197
control using · 16
controlling attributes · 126
disallowing speed wheel · 169
hyperdrive · 126
manually fading chases · 161
wipe options · 197
Wipeall link · 206
wiring of DMX sockets · 109
Pearl 2008 Manual - 16th July 2007
Download PDF